12th Chemistry Full Study Material em PDF

www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.
com
9943009170----{ KNS - STUDY MATERIAL FOR +2 CHEMISTRY }----8248795898
(INORGANIC-CHEMISTRY)
1. ATOMIC STRUCTURE-II
I. Choose the correct answer:
BOOK BACK QUESTIONS:
1. En = -313.6/n2, If the value of Ei = -34.84 to which value ‘n’ corresponds
a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1
2. Dual character of an electron was explained by
a) Bohr b) Heisenberg c) de-Broglie d) Pauli
3. de-Broglie equation is
a) λ=mv/h b)λ=hmv c) λ =hv/m d) λ=h/mv
4. The value of Bohr radius for hydrogen atom is
a) 0.529 x10-8 cm b) 0.529 x10-10 cm
c) 0.529 x10-6 cm d) 0.529 x10-12 cm
5. Which of the following particle having same kinetic energy, would have the
maximum de-Broglie wave length
a) α-particle b) proton c) β-particle d) neutron
6. If the energy of an electron in the second Bohr orbit of H-atom is -E, whatis the
energy of the electron in the Bohr’s first orbit?
a) 2E b) -4E c) -2E d) 4E
7. The energy of electron in an atom is given by En =
a)-4 2me4/n2h2 b)-2 2me2/n2h2 c) -2 2me4/n2h2 d) -2 me4/n2h2
8. The bond order of oxygen molecule is
a) 2.5 b) 1 c) 3 d) 2
9. The hybridization in SF6 molecule is
a) sp b) sp3d2 c) sp3d d) sp3d3
10. The intramolecular hydrogen bonding is present in
a) o-nitrophenol b) m-nitro phenol
c) p-nitro phenol d) None
(INSIDE QUESTIONS (MARCH 2006 – JUNE - 2015)
1. The wave nature of electrons can be verified by____________
a) J.J.Thomson experiment b) Milliken’s oil drop experiment
c) G.P. Thomson’s experiment d) Black Body radiation
2. Molecular orbital with less energy is____________
a) b) c) π2py d) π*2py
3. Circumference of the circular orbit of the electron should be an integral multiple
a) Planck’s constant b) Frequency of right radiation
c) De-Broglie wavelength d) Momentum of the electron
4. The type of hybridization in NH4+ ion is________________
a) SP b) SP2 c) SP3 d) SP3d
5. Momentum of particle which has de Broglie wave length of .(h=6.626x10-34kgm2S-1)
ss***{Page 1 of 258}***ss
EASY TO SCORE HIGH MARK IN BOARD EXAM - BY K.N.SUBRAMANI. M.Sc.B.Ed.,
http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com
a) 6.69x10-23 kgms-1 b) 6.6x10-24 kgms-1c) 6.6x10-34 kgms-1 d)6.6x1034 kgms-1
6. The bond order of nitrogen molecule is____________
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
7. The nature of hybridization in IF7 molecule is______________
a) SP3d2 b) SP3d4 c) SP3d3 d) SP2d4
8. Inter-molecular hydrogen bond is present in__________
a) HF b) H2O c) ethanol d) all of these
9. The hybridization involved in XeF6 is ______________
a) SP3d3 b) SP3d2 c) SP3d d) SP3
10. Energy levels of molecular orbitals have been determined experimentally by_
a) Spectroscopic studies b)x-ray diffraction
b) c)crystallographic studies d) none of these
11. In a molecule eight electrons are present in bonding molecular orbital and four
electrons are present in anti-bonding molecular orbital. Its bond order is _
a) 3 b) 4 c) 2.5 d) 2
12. Water exists in liquid state. This is due to ________
a) High boiling point b)low boiling point
c) Freezing point is zero d) Hydrogen bond.
13. Inter-molecular hydrogen bonding is present in __________
a) O-nitro phenol b) salicylic acid
c) O-hydroxybenzaldehyde d) hydrogen fluride
14. The hybridization in SO ion is _________
a) sp3 b)sp3d2 c)sp3d d)sp3d3
15. Number of spherical nodes in 2s orbital is ____________
a)1 b)2 c)3 d)4
16. The type of hybridization in PCl5 molecule is ___________
a) sp3d2 b) sp3d c)sp3 d)sp2
17. The type of hybridization in ICl4- molecule is ____________
a) sp3 b) sp3d c)sp3 d2 d)sp3d3
18. The molecular orbitals are filled according to
a) Pauli's exclusion principle b) Hund's rule
c) Aufbau principle d) All the above
19. Shape of p- orbitalis ------
a) spherical b) clover leaf c) dumb-bell d) doughnut
20. Which molecule is relatively more stable?
a) O2 b) H2 c) Li2 d) N2
21. The bond order of Hydrogen molecule is
a) 0 b) 1 c) 3 d) 2
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: {Q.No.31}

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. State Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.(Mar-2006, Sep-2007, Mar-2008,
Oct-2009,Mar-2011,Sep-11, Mar-13,jun-15).
Heisenberg uncertainty principle:
“It is impossible to measure simultaneously both the position and velocity (or
momentum) of a microscopic particle with absolute accuracy or certainty.”
∆x. ∆p ≥ h/4π
Where, ∆x = uncertainty in the position of the particle
∆p = uncertainty in the momentum of the particle
2. What is the significance of negative electronic energy?(June-2008, June

2009,July-2010, Mar-2012, Oct-2012,Mar-2014).
Significance of negative electronic energy:
 The energy of an electron at infinity is arbitrarily assumed to be zero. This
state is called zero-energy state.
 When an electron moves and comes under the influence of nucleus, it does
some work and spends its energy in this process.
 Thus, the energy of the electron decreases and it becomes less than zero
ie., it acquires a negative value.
3. He2 molecule does not form why?(Mar-2007, Oct-2008,Sep-2010)
He2 (Hypothetical):
(Z = 2), (or) 1s2 Electronic configuration He2: (σ1s)2 (σ*1s)2
He = 2e- He2 = 4e-
Molecular orbital energy level diagram of He2 (hypothetical) molecule
As the bond order for He2 comes out to be zero, this molecule does not exist.
4. Define-Bond order.(July-2007, Mar-2010)
Bond order: It is defined as half the difference between the number
of electrons in bonding molecular orbitals (Nb) and the number of electrons in
anti-bonding molecular orbitals (Na). Bond order = ½ (Nb- Na)
(Nb) = number of electrons in bonding molecular orbitals.

(Na) =number of electrons in anti-bonding molecular orbitals.
5. What is the essential condition of effective hydrogen bonding? (Oct 06,
June-11)
Condition for effective hydrogen bonding:
 High electronegativity of the atom bonded to hydrogen atom so that bond
is sufficiently polar.
 Small size of the atom bonded to hydrogen so that it is able to attract the
bonding electron pair effectively.
6. Distinguish between waves and particle.(June-2006, Jun – 2014,Oct - 2014)
PARTICLE WAVE
1).Localized in space 1).Delocalized in space.

2).Donot interfere. 2).Interfere.
3).Total value is equal to their 3).Resultant wave can be larger
sum. or Smaller than the individual
waves.
7. What is Hybridizations?(Mar-2009, Jun-2013, Mar - 2015)

Hybridization:
Hybridization is the concept of intermixing of the orbital’s of an atom
having nearly the same energy to give exactly equivalent orbitals with same
energy, identical shapes and symmetrical orientations in space.
IMPORTANT:
1. Define –Orbital.
Orbital:
An orbital is the region of space around the nucleus within which the
probability of finding an electron of given energy is maximum.
2. What do you mean Dual nature of matter?

Dual nature of matter:
Louis de Broglie, a French Physicist, in 1924, advanced the idea that like
photons, all material particles such as electron, proton, atom, molecule, a piece
of chalk, a piece of stone or iron ball possessed both wave character as well as
particle character. The wave associated with a particle is called a matter wave.
3. Define molecular orbital.

Molecular orbital:
In molecules atomic orbitals lose their identity and the electrons in
molecules are present in new orbitals called molecular orbitals.
III. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No.52 }

1. Explain the molecular orbital theory for Oxygen (O2) molecule.
 (Z = 8), Electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 2p4.

 O = 8 electrons; O2 = 16 electrons.
Molecular orbital energy level diagram of O2 molecule
 Electronic configuration of O2 :
KK (σ2S)2(σ*2S)2(σ2pz)2(π2Px)2=(π2Py)2 (π* 2Px)1=(π* 2Py)1.
Where, (KK= σ1S σ*1S).
 Nature: Double bond & Paramagnetic
2. Explain the molecular orbital theory for Nitrogen (N2) molecule.
 (Z=7), Electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 2p3

 N = 7 Electrons, N2 = 14 Electrons. (KK= σ1S σ*1S).
 Electronic configuration of N2 :
KK (σ2S)2 (σ*2S)2 (π2Px)2= (π2Py)2 (σ2pz)2.
Molecular orbital energy level diagram of N2
 Nature: Triple Bond &Diamagnetic .
3. Give any five postulates of molecular orbital theory (MOT).
Postulates Molecular orbital theory (MOT).

 In a molecule, electrons are present in new orbitals called molecular
orbitals.
 Atomic orbital + Atomic orbital → Molecular orbitals. Atomic orbital are
Equal energies (in case of homo nuclear molecules) or
Comparable energies (in case of hetero nuclear molecules).
 Number of molecular orbitals equal to Number of atomic orbitals
undergoing combination.
 When two atomic orbital combine to formtwo Molecular orbitals. One has
Lower energy is called bonding molecular orbital. Other has Higher
energy is called anti-bonding molecular orbital.
 The shapes of molecular orbitals depend upon the shapes of combining
atomic orbitals.
 Bonding molecular orbitals are represented by σ, π,δ .
Anti-bonding molecular orbitals are represented by σ*, π*,δ*.
4. Derive De-Broglie equation. Give its significance.
For wave character,

E = hν (Planck’s quantum theory) ..................(i)
For particle character,
E = mc2(Einstein equation) .............................(ii)
From equations (i) and (ii), we get
h ν = mc2
But ν = c / λ
∴h .c / λ = mc2
λ = h / mc (or) λ = h / mv (or) λ = h / p
Where, mv = p is the momentum of the particle.
Significance of de-Broglie equation : It has significant only for

(particle with a wave character) sub-microscopic objects in the range of
atoms, molecules or smaller sub-atomic particles.
5. Explain Davisson and Germer’s experiments.

Davisson and Germer’s Experiment:
 A beam of electrons obtained from a heated tungsten filament is accelerated
by using a high positive potential.
 Electron is allowed to fall on a large single crystal of nickel, the electrons
are scattered from the crystal in different directions.
 The diffraction pattern so obtained is similar to the diffraction pattern
obtained by Bragg’s experiment on diffraction of X-rays.
 Since X-rays have wave character, therefore, the electrons must also have
wave character associated with them.
 The wave length of the electrons as determined by the diffraction
experiments were found to be in agreement with the values calculated
from de-Broglie equation.
6. Give the salient features of hybridization.
Salient Features regarding Hybridization:
 Orbitals involved in hybridization should have nearly the same energy.

 The orbitals of one and the same atom participate in hybridization.
 Number of hybrid orbitals = Number of hybridizing orbitals.
 The hybrid orbitals are all equivalent in shape and energy.
 A hybrid orbital which is taking part in bond formation must contain one
electron in it.
7. What is Hydrogen bond? Explain its types.

Hydrogen bonding:
 It’s a dipole-dipole interactions between the molecules in which

hydrogen atom is covalently bonded to a highly electronegative atom.
 Types of Hydrogen bonds
(a )Intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

This type of bond is formed between the two molecules of the same or
different compounds.
Example: 1. Hydrogen fluoride, Hδ+ - Fδ-.
(b) Intramolecular hydrogen bonding.

This type of bond is formed between hydrogen atom and N, O or F
atom of the same molecule. Example : (O – nitro phenol)
2. PERIODIC CLASSIFICATION-II
I. Choose the correct answer;
1. The value of C-C distance found experimentally in a saturated hydrocarbonis
a) 1.34Å b) 1.36Å c) 1.54Å d) 1.56Å
2. On moving down the group, the radius of an ion
a) Decreases b) Increases c) No change d)None of these
3. Effective nuclear charge (Z*) can be calculated by using the formula
a) Z* = Z – S b) Z* = Z + S c) Z* = S – Z d) Z = Z* – S
4. Pick the correct statement
a) Carbon having more nuclear charge than boron
b) The size of carbon atoms is larger than boron
c) Carbon forms electron deficient compounds
d) Carbon forms ionic compounds
5. Comparing the ionization energy of fluorine with carbon, fluorine has
a) Higher ionization energy b) lower ionization energy
c) Same ionization energy d) none of these
6. Among the following which has the maximum ionization energy
a) Alkali elements b) Alkaline elements
c) Halogens d) Noble gases
7. The electron affinity of an atom
a) Directly proportional to its size c) is independent of its size
b) Inversely proportional to its size d) none of these
8. Among the following which has higher electron affinity value
a) Fluorine b) Chlorine c) Bromine d) Iodine
9. The scale which is based on an empirical relation between the energy of a bond
and the electro negativities of bonded atoms is
a) Pauling scale b) Mulliken’s scale
c) Sanderson’s scale d) Alfred and Rochow’s scale
10. Electron affinity is expressed in
a) kJ b) J c) kJ mol d) kJ mol-1
11. The bond length of Cl2 molecule is
a) 0.74 b) 1.44 c) 1.98 d) 2.28
12. The order of ionization energy
a) s< p < d < f b) s > p > d > f c) s > d > p > f d) s<d<p<f
13. Across the period, electron affinity
a) Decreases b) increases
c) Decrease and the increases d) increase and then decreases
14. Noble gases have _____electron affinity
a) High b) Low c) Zero d) Very low
15. When XA>>XB, A–B bond is
a) Polar covalent b) non-polar covalent c) Ionic d) metallic
(INSIDE QUESTIONS (MARCH 2006 – JUNE 2015)

1. The metal having maximum electron affinity is ____________
a) Sodium b) Calcium c) Gold d) Silver
2. Among the following which has higher electronegativity value?
a) Fluorine b) Chlorine c) Bromine d) Iodine
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No.32 }

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Why the ionization energy of Be is greater than Li? (June 2006, 11)
Reason:
 Because the nuclear charge of Be (Z=4) is greater than Li(Z=3).
 Higher the nuclear charge, greater would be the force of attraction between
nucleus and outermost electron.
2. Why the ionization energy of Be is greater than B?(Oct-2006,Jun-08,

Mar-14)
Reason:
 Nuclear charge of Boron (Z=5) is greater than that of Beryllium (Z=4).
ss***{Page 10 of 258}***ss
 Boron atom (Z = 5; 1s2 2s2 2px1 2py0 2pz0) is having one unpaired electron in
the 2p-subshell. Be-atom (Z = 4; 1s2 2s2) is having paired electrons in the 2s
subshell.
 As the fully filled 2s-subshell in Be-atom is more stable than B-atom due to
symmetry, more energy would be needed to remove an electron from Be-
atom. Hence, Be has high I. E.
3. Why the ionization energy of Flourine is greater than Oxygen? (Oct-09)

Reason:
 Because the nuclear charge of F (Z=9,1s2 2s2 2px2 2py2 2pz1) is greater
than O (Z=8, 1s2 2s2 2px2 2py1 2pz1).
4. The electron affinity of Fluorine is less than that of Chlorine? (Mar-

2006,June-2009,Sep-2010, Mar-2013)
Reason:
 Due to small size of fluorine atom.
 The addition of an extra electron produces high electron density which
increases strong electron-electron repulsion.
 The repulsive forces between electrons results in low electron affinity.
5. Ionisation energy of Neon is greater than that Flourine Give the reason.
(Mar-2009, July-2010)
Reason:
 Ne has stable electronic configuration (ns2 np6). So, its Ionisation energy is
high.
 The nuclear charge of Ne (Z=10,1s2 2s2 2px2 2py2 2pz2) is greater than F
(Z=9, 1s2 2s2 2px2 2py2 2pz1).
6. The experimental value of d(C-Cl) is 1.76A0.what is the atomic radius of

carbon?(July-2007)
The experimental value of d(C – Cl) is 1.76 Å
Thus d(C–Cl) = r(C) + r(Cl)
r(C) = d(C – Cl) – r(Cl)
r(C) = 1.76 – r(Cl) = 1.76 – 0.99
r (C) = 0.77 Å
ss***{Page 11 of 258}***ss
7. Calculate the effective nuclear charge of K+ ion. (Sep-2007, 12)
K+ = (1s2) (2s2 2p6) (3s23p6)
Inner shell (n-1)th shell nth shell
Z*(K+) = Z – S
Z*(K+) = 19 – [(0.35 x 7) + (0.85 x 8) + (1 x 2)] = 19 – 11.25
Z*(K+) = 7.75
8. What are the disadvantage of Pauling’s scale and Milliken’s scale? (Oct-08)
Disadvantage of Pauling scale:( Jun – 14,15)
 Bond energies are not known with any degree of accuracy for many solid
elements.
Disadvantage Mullikan’s scale:( Jun – 14)
 Mulliken’s scale is less empirical than Pauling Scale.
Electron affinities with the exception of a few elements are not
reliably known.
9. Compare the ionization energy of nitrogen with Oxygen. (Mar2007)
Reason:
 The nuclear charge of Oxygen atom (Z=8) is greater than that of Nitrogen
atom (Z = 7). But,
 Nitrogen atom (Z = 7; 1s2 2s2 2px1 2py1 2pz1) is having half-filled electron in
the 2p-subshell.
 O-atom (Z = 8; 1s2 2s2 2px2 2py1 2pz1) is not having half-filled electrons in the
2p subshell.
 As the half-filled 2p-subshell in N-atom is more stable than O-atom due to
symmetry, more energy would be needed to remove an electron from N-atom.
Hence, N has high I. E.
10. Define electron affinity.(Mar-2007, oct - 2014)

Electron affinity:
Electron affinity or electron gain enthalpy is the amount of energy
released when an isolated gaseous atom accepts an electron to form a
monovalent gaseous anion.
Atom(g) +Electron(g)→ Anion(g)+ Energy(g).
11. The Electron Affinities of beryllium and nitrogen are almost zero-why?
(Mar-2010)
Reason:
 Due to the extra stability of the completed 2s-orbital in beryllium and of
the exactly half-filled p-orbital in nitrogen.
ss***{Page 12 of 258}***ss
 As these are stable electronic configurations, they do not have tendency to
accept electrons.
12. The Electron Affinities of beryllium, calcium and magnesium are almost
zero-why? (Jun-2013)
Reason:
 Be, Ca & Mg is attributed to extra stability of the fully completed s-orbitals
in them.
 Thus, If an atom has fully filled or half-filled orbitals, its electron affinity will
be low.
13. Larger the size of atom, lesser is the ionization energy-explain. (Sep-11)
Reason:
 Due to the fact that electrons are tightly held in smaller atoms whereas in
large atoms, electrons are held quite loose.
 i.e., lesser energy is required for removal of electrons from larger atoms than
the smaller one.
 Hence ionization energy is lower for larger atoms and higher for smaller
atoms.
EXTRA:
1. State the Slater’s rule.
Slater rules
The value of screening constant (S) and effective nuclear charge (Z*) can be
calculated by using Slater’s rules. According to these rules the value of “S” for a
given electron is estimated as follows.
i) Write down the complete electronic configuration of the element and divide
the electrons into the following orbital groups starting from the inside of the atom.
(1s) : (2s, 2p) : (3s, 3p) : (3d) : (4s, 4p) : (4d) : (4f) : (5s, 5p) : (6s, 6p) .......etc.
ii) Select the electron for which the value of S is to be calculated. For this
calculation add up the contributions to S for the other electrons according to the
following rules.
Type of electron Contribution to S for each electron of this type
i) All electrons in groups outside
The electron chosen 0
ii) All other electrons in the same 0.35
Group as the chosen one (n) (or 0.30 for 1s electron)
iii) All electrons in shell immediately inside (n–1) 0.85
iv) All electrons further inside 1.00
2. The value of Cl-Cl bond distance is 1.98A0.what is the atomic radius of

chlorine?
ss***{Page 13 of 258}***ss
3. Ionisation energy of C is greater than B . Give reason.

Reason:
 Carbon (Z = 6; 1s2 2s2 2px1 2py1 2pz0) is having more nuclear charge than
boron (Z = 5; 1s2 2s2 2px 1 2py02pz0).
 In both the cases, one has to remove electron from same 2p-subshell.
 Carbon is having more nuclear charge than boron.
 Therefore the nucleus of carbon attracts the outer 2p electron more firmly
than does boron.
4. Ionisation energy of Mg is greater than Na. Give reason.

Reason:
 Magnesium has higher nuclear charge (12 protons) as compared to sodium
(11 protons).
5. Ionisation energy of Al is lower thanthat of Mg . Give reason.

Reason:
 The electronic configuration of Magnesium is [Ne]3s2 and that of Aluminium
is [Ne] 3s2 3p1.
 Thus, one has to remove 3p-electron in case of Aluminium and 3s electron in
the case of magnesium. But it is easier to remove the p electron than the s-
electron.
6. E.A. of gold is comparatively high compared to other metals-why?

Reason:
 E.A. of gold is comparatively high (222.7 kJ mol-1).
 This value may be attributed to the higher effective nuclear charge and
poor shielding of the nucleus by d electrons.
7. Define Atomic radii.

Atomic radii
Atomic radius is the distance from the centre of the nucleus to the point
where the electron density is effectively zero.
8. Define Ionisation energy (or) Ionisation potential.

Ionisation energy
The energy required to remove the most loosely bound electron from an
isolated atom in the gaseous state in known as Ionisation Energy.
ss***{Page 14 of 258}***ss
9. Define Electronegativity.
Electronegativity
Electronegativity may be defined as the relative tendency of an atom in
a molecule to attract the shared pair of electrons towards itself.
10. Calculate the effective nuclear charge experienced by the valence electron
in potassium atom?
K19 = (1s2) (2s2 2p6) (3s2 3p6) 4s1
Effective nuclear charge (Z*) = Z – S
Z* = 19 – [(0.85 x No. of electrons in (n –1)th shell) + (1.00 x total
number of electrons in the inner shells)]
Z* = 19 – [0.85 x (8) + (1.00 x 10)]
Z*= 2.20
11. Calculate the effective nuclear charge of the last electron in an atom whose
configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5.
Z = 17
Z* = Z – S
Z* = 17 – [(0.35 x No. of other electrons in nth shell) + (0.85 x No.
of electrons in (n –1)th shell) + (1.00 x total number of
electrons in the inner shells)]
Z* = 17 – [(0.35 x 6) + (0.85 x 8) + (1 x 2)]
Z* = 17 – 10.9 = 6.1.
12. Calculate the electronegativity values of fluorine and chlorine on

Mulliken’s scale, given that (Ionisation potential) F = 17.4 eV/atom
(Electron affinity) F = 3.62 ev/atom, (IP)Cl = 13.0 ev/atom and (EA)Cl = 4.0
ev
ss***{Page 15 of 258}***ss
IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 64 (a) }

1. How is atomic radii calculated from covalent bond length?
a. Homonuclear diatomic molecules (A2 type) (e.g.F2,Cl2,Br2,I2 .. etc.)

The bond length, d(A-A) is given by
d(A – A) = r(A) + r(A)
d(A – A) = 2 r(A)
r(A) = d(A – A)/2
b. Heteronuclear diatomic molecule : (AB type) (e.g. CCl4, SiC)
Bond length (A–B) is given by
d (A – B) = r(A) + r(B)
r (A) and r(B) are the covalent radii of A and B atoms.
2. Explain Pauling’s method of determination of ionic radii.
Pauling’s Method:
It is basis of the observed internuclear distances in four crystals
namely NaF, KCl, RbBr and CsI.
In each ionic crystal the cations and anions are isoelectronic with
inert gas configuration.
Na+ - 2, 8 Ne type cofiguration
F - 2, 8
¯
Following two assumptions are made to assign the ionic radii.
(i) r(C+) + r(A¯ ) = d (C+–A¯ ) ……………….. (1) where,
r(C+) - radius of cation and r(A¯ ) - radius of anion

d (C+–A¯ ) - internuclear distance between C+ and A- ions
(ii). For a given noble gas configuration,
r (C+) α 1/ Z* (C+) …………………….. (2)
r (A¯ ) α 1/ Z* (A¯) …………………….. (3) Where,
Z*(C+) & Z*(A–) are the effective nuclear charges of cation (C+) and anion
(A-) respectively. On combining (2) & (3),
r (C+) / r (A¯ ) = Z* (A¯) / Z* (C+) ……….. (4)
Hence the above two equations (1) & (4) can be used to evaluate the values of r(C+)
and r(A-) provided that the values of d(C+–A-), Z*(C+) and Z*(A-) are known.
3. Explain the various factors that affect electron affinity.

ss***{Page 16 of 258}***ss
Factors affecting electron affinity:
1) Atomic size: 1
Electron affinity α ----------------

Size of atom
2) Electron affinity α Effective nuclear charge.
3) Shielding or Screening Effect:

Electronic energy state, lying between nucleus and outermost state
hinder the nuclear attraction for incoming electron. So,
1
Electron affinity α --------------------
Shielding effect.
4) Electronic Configuration:
Electron affinities of inert gases are zero,stable ns2np6 configuration.
No possibility for addition of an extra electron in their valance shell.
4. Explain the various factors affecting Ionization energy.
1) Atomic size: 1
Ionization energy α ---------------
Size of atom
2) Ionization energy α Effective nuclear charge.
3) Shielding or Screening Effect : 1

Ionization energy α -----------------------
Shielding effect
4) Effect of shape of orbital:
As s-electrons remain closer to the nucleus than p-,d-, and f-
electrons of the same valence shell. So,
I.E of (s > p > d >f )
5) Effect of arrangement of electrons:

More stable the electronic arrangement, the greater is the ionization energy .
As the noble gases have the stable electronic arrangements, they show
maximum ionization energy.
5. Explain the Pauling’s scale to determine the Electro negativity? Give its
disadvantage.
Pauling’s scale (1932)
This scale is based on an empirical relation between the energy of a
bond and the electro negativities of bonded atoms.
ss***{Page 17 of 258}***ss
Bond energies of A-A, B-B and A-B bonds be represented as EA-A, EB-B and
EA-B respectively.
Their difference (∆) is related to the difference in the electro

negativities of A and B according to the following equation
XA& XB = Electro negativities of A and B .

Factor 0.208 arises from the conversion of Kcals to electron volt.
Considering arbitarily the electronegativity of hydrogen to be 2.1.
Disadvantage: Bond energies are not known with any degree of accuracy
for many solid elements.
6. Explain the Mulliken’s scale to determine the Electro negativity? Give its
disadvantage.
Mulliken’s Scale: This scale based on Ionization energy (I.E) and Electron
affinity (E.A)of an atom.
Mulliken used (I.E) & (E.A) values measured in electron volts and it is found
to be 2.8 times higher than Pauling values.
Unit of (I.E) & (E.A) are kJ mol-1 and 1eV=96.48 kJ mol-1. Therefore,
This method has an ordinary theoretical basis and also has advantage that
different values can be obtained for different oxidation states of the same
element.
Disadvantage :
Electron affinities with the exception of a few elements are not reliably
known.
7. How electronegativity values help to find out the nature of bonding between
atoms?
ss***{Page 18 of 258}***ss
S. Electro negativity Nature of Bond Example
No
1. XA = XB (or) non polar H-H bond in H2
XA- XB =0 covalent (or)
covalent
2. XA > XB , polar covalent O-H bonds in H2O ( )
XA - XB is small Since (XO - XH is small)
3. XA>> XB (or) ionic or polar Na-Cl bond in Na Cl (Na+Cl-
XA - XB is very large (Here Cl = A and Na = B).
8. How electronegativity values help to find out the percentage of ionic

character in a polar covalent bond?
S.No Electro Ionic Covalent Bond type

negativity Character Character
1. (XA–XB) =1.7 50% 50% Polar covalent
( A -- B + )
2. (XA–XB) <1.7 Less than 50% Greater than 50% Covalent (A-B)
3. (XA–XB) >1.7 Greater than 50% Less than 50% Ionic (A- - B+)
3. P-BLOCK ELEMENTS
I. Choose the correct Answer:
1. Which of the following does not belong to group 13?
a) B b) Al c) Ge d) In
2. Which of the following is most abundant in earth’s crust?
a) C b) Si c) Ge d) Sn
ss***{Page 19 of 258}***ss
3. An element which was burnt in limited supply of air to give oxide A which on
treatment with water gives an acid. B. Acid B on heating gives acid C which gives
yellow precipitate with AgNO3 solution A is
a) SO2 b) NO2 c) P2O3 d) SO3
4. The compound with garlic odour is
a) P2 O3 b) P2O5 c) H3PO3 d) H3PO4
5. The shape of PCl5 is
a) Pyramidal b) trigonalbipyramidal c) Linear d) tetrahedral
6. The compound used as smoke screen
a) PCl3 b) PCl5 c) PH3 d) H3PO3
7. Which shows only -1 oxidation state?
a) fluorine b) bromine c) chlorine d) iodine
8. One can draw the map of building on a glass plate by
a) HI b) HF c) HBr d) HCl
9. Among the halogen acid, the weakest acid is
a) HF b) HCl c) HBr d) HI
10. Halogens belong to the group number
a) 14 b) 15 c) 17 d) 18
11. The noble gases are unreactive because they
a) have same number of electrons b) have an atomicity of one
c) Are gases with low densities d) Have stable electronic configuration.
12. The shape of XeF4 is
a) Tetrahedral b) octahedral c) square planar d) pyramidal
13. Which is not known?
a) XeF6 b) XeF4 c) XeO3 d) ArF6
14. The lightest gas which is non-inflammable is
a) He b) H2 c) N2 d) Ar
15. Which of the following has highest first ionisation energy?
a) He b) Ne c) Ar d) Kr.
1. The electronic configuration of 14th group element (carbon family) is___
a) ns2np2 b)ns1np1 c) ns1np2d d) ns2np1
2. The metalloid among the following is _____
a) Pb b)P c)Ge d)Sn
3. The toxic element of Boron family is ____________
a) Boron b)Indium c)Thallium d)Gallium
4. Which of the following does not belong to group 14?
a) C b)Si c)Ga d)Pb
5. Which of the following has the property of etching of glass?
a) HI b)HF c)HBr d)HCl
ss***{Page 20 of 258}***ss
6. The compound used to arrest the bleeding is _________
a) K2SO4 b)Potash alum c) Al2(SO4)3 d)KI
7. Which of the following shows negative oxidation state only?
a) Br b)F c)Cl d)I
8. An element which belongs to group is 14 is soft in nature, does not react with
pure water. But dissolve in water containing dissolved air. Then the element
a) C b)Ge c)Pb d)Ti
9. Inert gas used in beacon lights for safety of air navigation is __________
a) Helium b)Argon c)Neon d)Xenon
10. The compound with garlic taste is _____
a) P2O3 b) P2O5 c) H3PO3 d) H3PO3
11. Which of the following is second most abundant element in earth crust?
a) Carbon b) Silicon c) Germanium d) tin
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 33& 34 }
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What is plumbo solvency? (D.Q, July-2006, Oct-2006,July-2007,June-
2009,Mar-2010,Sep-2010,June-2011, Mar-2013,oct-2014,jun-15)
Lead is not attacked by pure water in the absence of air, but water
containing dissolved air has a solvent action on it due to the formation of lead
hydroxide (a poisonous substance). This phenomenon is called Plumbo
solvency.
2Pb + O2 + 2H2O → 2Pb(OH)2
2. Explain the dehydrating property of P2O5?(Oct-2006, Mar-2007, Mar-2012,

Oct-2012,Mar-2014)
3. H3PO3 is diprotic-Explain?(Sep-2009,Mar-2010,Jun-2013, Jun – 14,Oct-14)

Diprotic
Acidic nature: It is a dibasic acid and gives salts of two types.
ss***{Page 21 of 258}***ss
H3PO3 + NaOH → NaH2PO3 + H2O
Sodium dihydrogen Phosphite
H3PO3 + 2NaOH → Na2HPO3 + 2H2O
Disodium hydrogen Phosphite
4. Draw the electron dot formula for i) H3PO3 and ii) PCl5 (Oct-2008,Jun-11,15)
H3PO3
PCl5
5. What happens when H3PO3 is heated? (June-2009)
6. What happens when H3PO4 is heated? (June-2009,Mar-2011)
7. H3PO4 is a tri basic acid-Explain. (Mar-2006, Mar-2013,Mar-2015)

H3PO4 +NaOH → NaH2PO4 + H2O
Sodium Di hydrogen Phosphate
H3PO4 +2NaOH → Na2HPO4 + 2H2O
Disodium hydrogen Phosphate
H3PO4 + 3NaOH → Na3PO4 + 3H2O
Sodium Phosphate
8. Write a note on etching on Glass (OR) HF is not stored in glass bottle why?
(Mar-2007,Mar-2011)
Aqueous HF thus obtained is stored in wax bottles. It cannot be stored in
glass or silica bottles as it attacks silicates and silica.
Na2 SiO3 + 6HF → Na2SiF6 + 3H2O
SiO2 + 4HF → SiF4 + 2H2O
9. Write note on Holme’s signal? (Sep-2007,Oct-2009)
ss***{Page 22 of 258}***ss
Holme’s signal:
Containers which have a perforated bottom and a hole at the top are filled
with calcium phosphide and calcium carbide. These are thrown into the sea. Water
enters the container through the bottom and reacts with calcium carbide and
calcium phosphide to give acetylene and phosphine. Phosphine gets ignited
spontaneously as it comes in contact with air and also ignites acetylene. Thus a
bright red flame is produced which is accompanied by huge smoke due to the
burning of phosphine. This serves as a signal to the approaching ships.
Ca3P2 + 6H2O → 2 PH3 ↑+ 3Ca(OH)2
CaC2 + 2H2O → C2H2 ↑ + Ca(OH)2
10. Explain the oxidizing power of fluorine?(July-2007, Sep-2011, Jun-2013)

Oxidizing power of fluorine
 It is due to high electron affinity of halogen atoms.
 The oxidizing power decreases from fluorine to iodine.
 Fluorine is the strongest oxidizing agent. It oxidizes other halide ions to
halogens in solution or when dry.
F2 + 2 X– → 2F – + X2 (X– = Cl–, Br –, I–)
 Halogen of low atomic number oxidize the halide ion of higher atomic
number
11. How is potash alum prepared?(Mar-2008, Jun-2012,)
Potash alum (K2SO4. Al2 (SO4)3 . 24H2O)
 Potash Alum is manufactured from alunite or alum stone.
 From Alunite: Alunite or alum stone is K2SO4. Al2 (SO4)3. 4Al (OH) 3. It is
finely powdered and boiled with dilute sulphuric acid, the aluminium
hydroxide part changes into aluminium sulphate.
 When a little more potassium sulphate in calculated amount is added, the
alum is crystallized.
12. Draw the electron dot formula forH3PO3 (Mar-2008)
13. Explain the laboratory preparation of ortho phosphoric acid? (June-2008)

Laboratory preparation:
In the laboratory ortho phosphoric acid can be prepared by boiling a mixture
of red phosphorus with 50% nitric acid in a flask fitted with a reflux condenser
on a water bath till no more oxides of nitrogen are liberated.
ss***{Page 23 of 258}***ss
Iodine acts as a catalyst. The product is evaporated below 453 K and then
cooled in a vacuum desiccators surrounded by freezing mixture when crystals
of ortho phosphoric acid are deposited.
P+5HNO3 → H3PO4 +5NO2 +H2O
14. What is inert pair effect? (Mar-2009)

Inert pair effect
 The tendency of being less availability for ns electron in bonding.
 The inert pair effect increases down the group with the increase in atomic
number.
15. Explain the reducing property of H3PO3? (July-2006,Mar-2007,Mar-

2009,Jun-2010)
It is a powerful reducing agent because it has P-H bond. It reduces silver
nitrate solution into silver.
2AgNO3 + H3PO3 + H2O → 2Ag +H3PO4+2HNO3
16. What are inter halogen compounds? Give the preparation of any one (Oct-
2008, Mar - 2015)
Each halogen combines with another halogen to form several compounds
known as interhalogen compounds.
Ι2 + Cl2 liquid (equi molar) → 2ΙCl (AX type)
17. Give the uses of Helium? (Sep-2007, Mar-2014)

 Because of its lightness and non-inflammability helium is used to filling
balloons for meteorological observations.
 Because of its lightness it is used in inflating aeroplane tyres.
 A mixture of oxygen and helium is used in the treatment of asthma.
18. Give the uses of Neon (D.Q, June-2008)

 Neon is used in discharge tubes and fluorescent bulbs for advertisement
display purposes.
 Mixed with helium it is used to protect electrical instruments from high
Voltages.
 It is also used in beacon lights for safety of air navigation as the light
possesses fog and storm-penetrating power.
19. Give any three uses of Fluorine? (Oct-2012)

 CaF2 is used as flux in metallurgy
 NaF is used as a preservative to prevent fermentation and also for
preventing dental cavities.
ss***{Page 24 of 258}***ss
 SF6 is used as an insulating material in high voltage equipment.
20. Write the preparation of ClF, ClF3, IF7. (Jun-2012)
IMPORTANT:
1. Why H2O is a liquid while H2S is a gas?

Because,
 Presence of Intermolecular hydrogen bond in H2O.
 Absence of Intermolecular hydrogen bond in H2S.
2. Why the compounds of fluorine with oxygen are called fluorides of oxygen
and not oxides of fluorine?
 Fluorine is more electronegative than Oxygen. Its compounds with
oxygen are called fluorides of oxygen and not oxides of fluorine.
 e.g : F2O is written as OF2 and is named as oxygen difluoride.
3. Write the reaction of Lead with con HCl?

Pb + 2HCl → PbCl2 +H2↑
PbCl2 + 2HCl H2PbCl4
Chloroplumbic acid
4. Fluorine atom is more electronegative than iodine atom yet, HF has lower
acid strength than HI.
 Fluorine atom has great electron affinity for hydrogen, forming
intermolecular H-bonding.
 HF has maximum bond dissociation energy.
 So, HF does not ionize easily.
 But HI can be easily dissociated into H+ and I- ions. Thus HI is the strongest
acid.
5. Explain? What is burnt alum? (Jun – 2014)

Burnt alum
ss***{Page 25 of 258}***ss
 When heated, it melts at 365K and on further heating loses the whole of
its water of crystallization and swells up.
 The swollen mass so produced is called burnt alum.
6. Why do noble gases form compounds with fluorine and oxygen only?
 Among the noble gases, Xenon has the low ionization energy.
 But both Fluorine and Oxygen have very high electron affinity.
 So, electrons of Xenon can easily react with oxygen or fluorine to form
compounds.
EXTRA:
1. Give the uses of Krypton and Xenon?
Uses of Krypton and Xenon:
 Krypton and xenon are also used in filling incandescent metal filament
electric bulbs.
 They are also used to a small extent in discharge tubes.
2. Give the uses of Argon and Radon?

Uses of Argon:
 Mixed with 26% percent nitrogen it is used in gas filled electric lamp.
 It is also used in radio valves and tubes.
Uses of Radon: It is used in radioactive research and in radiotherapy for
treatment of cancer.
3. Give three preparations of fluorides of Xenon?
4. How will you prepare PH3 in laboratory?

Laboratory preparation: It is usually obtained by boiling white phosphorus
with 30-40% solution of caustic soda in an inert atmosphere of CO2.
4P + 3NaOH + 3H2O → PH3 + 3NaH2PO2
(Impure) Sodium
hypophosphite
PH3 + HI → PH4I
(Impure)
PH4I + NaOH → PH3 + NaI + H2O
(Pure)
ss***{Page 26 of 258}***ss
5. Explain the reducing property of PH3?
PH3 + 6AgNO3 + 3H2O → 6Αg + 6HNO3 + H3PO3
IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 64 (b) }

1. Give any five uses of silicones.
Uses of silicones:
1. Silicones: act as excellent insulators for electric motors and other
appliances.
2. Straight chain polymers of 20 to 500 units :used in waterproofing
textiles, as lubricants and as polish.
3. Silicone rubber:They are mixed with paints to make them damp-
resistant.
4. Silicone resins: used as non-stick coating for pans and are used in paints
and varnish.
5. Silicone oils:Used for high temperature oil bath, high vacuum pump etc.
2. Give any five anomalous nature of Fluorine?

Anamalous Nature of Fluorine:
1. It is most reactive than other halogen. It is due to minimum bond
dissociation energy of F―F.
2. It forms two types of salts with metals. NaF and NaHF2.But other halogen
do not.
3. AgF is soluble in water, which is a salt of HF, while the other AgX are
insoluble.
4. It has only a negative oxidation state, while other halogens can have
negative as well as positive oxidation state.
5. HF attacks glass while others do not.
3. How is Lead extracted from Galena?

Extraction: Lead is mainly extracted from the sulphide ore galena.
1. Concentration: froth floatation process.
2. Smelting in a Reverberatory furnace:
2PbS + 3O2 → 2 PbO + 2SO2
PbS + 2O2 → PbSO4 then, more of galena is added.
PbS +2PbO → 3Pb+SO2
PbS +PbSO4 → 2Pb+2SO2
Thus in this process roasting and smelting are carried out in the same furnace,
at two different temperatures.
ss***{Page 27 of 258}***ss
About 90% of lead is obtained as metal, the rest passes into slag. Lead is
recovered from the slag by heating with lime and powdered coke.
Purification of Lead:
Electrolytic refining: Very pure lead is obtained by this process.
Anode – Impure lead and Cathode – Very pure lead
Electrolyte – PbSiF6 + H2SiF6
4. Explain the separation of individual rare gases by Dewar’s method.
Separation of noble gases:(DEWAR’S METHOD):
The mixture of noble gases obtained by Ramsay-

Raleigh’s method is separated into individual constituents by the use of
coconut charcoal which adsorbs different gases at different temperatures.
 The mixture of noble gases is passed into a double-walled bulb

containing coconut charcoal.
S.No Adsorbed Unadsorbed
1. At 173K,Ar,Kr,Xe He and Ne
2. At 93K, Ne He
3. At 173K containing Ar, kr and
Xe is placed in contact with
another charcoal at the Kr and Xe
temperature of the liquid air.
Ar diffused into the other
charcoal.
4. At 183K, Xe Kr
5. Explain Ramsay and Raleigh’s method of separation of noble gases from air.
Ramsay - Raleigh’s method:-
 A mixture of air and oxygen is constantly admitted into a glass globe of
about 50 litres capacity.
 When 6000 - 8000 volts is passed through two platinum electrodes,
following process will take place.
N2+ O2 → 2 NO ; 2 NO + O2 → 2NO2
2NO2 + 2NaOH → NaNO3 + NaNO2 + H2O
ss***{Page 28 of 258}***ss
 Excess Oxygen, is removed by introducing alkaline pyrogallol in the globe.
Chemical method for isolation of noble gases

6. How is Fluorine isolated by Danni’s method?
ISOLATION OF FLUORINE (Dennis’ Method):
 In this fluorine is prepared by the electrolysis of fused sodium or
potassium hydrogen fluoride (perfectly dry).
 Electrolysis is carried out between graphite electrodes in a V-shaped
electrically heated copper tube.
 The ends of the tube are covered with copper caps into which the graphite
electrodes are fixed with Bakelite cement. The copper tube is thickly
lagged to prevent loss of heat.
KHF2 → KF + HF HF→ H+ + F¯
2H+ + 2e–→ H2 (At cathode) 2F – – 2e– → F2 (At anode)
Preparation of Fluorine
Fluorine liberated at the anode is passed through the U-tube containing
sodium fluoride. This removes the hydrogen fluoride vapours coming with
fluorine.
NaF +HF → NaHF2
7. Write a note on structure and shape of inter halogen compounds of iodine.

Structures of inter halogen compounds
Inter halogen compounds are generally covalent compounds in which
the larger halogen forms the central atom.
ss***{Page 29 of 258}***ss
1. Type AX. Examples - CΙF, BrF, BrCl, ΙBr and ΙCI

Electronic structure of Chlorine atom, in the ground state and
hybridized state is represented as
Linear structure of the inter halogen compounds of the type AX

 (bonding pair = 1 and loan pairs = 3)
 Structure-tetrahedral, Linear (due to the presence of three lone pairs of
electrons)
2. Type AX3: Example: ClF3.
sp3dhybridization involved in the formation of ClF3 molecule
Bi pyramidal structure of CIF3 molecule

 Structure-trigonalbipyramidal (without lone pair it is T-shaped).
 Hybridization - sp3d
 The three dotted arrows indicate electrons contributed by the three
fluorine atoms
Type AX5: (ΙF5, BrF5, etc.)
 Hybridization-sp3d2
 Structure-octahedral (without lone pair it is square pyramidal)
ss***{Page 30 of 258}***ss
Type AX7: (ΙF7). This compound has a pentagonal bi pyramidal

structure since this is formed by sp3d3hybridisation.
F
Structure of IF7
8. Give the general characteristics of p-block elements?
General characteristics of p-block elements :( any five)

1. Electronic configuration – ns2 np1-6.
2. These elements include metals and non-metals with a few semi metals
(Metalloids)
3. Most of them form covalent compounds.
4. These elements possess relatively higher ionization energy and the value
tends to increase along the period but decrease down the group.
5. Most of the elements show negative (except some metals) as well as
positive oxidation states (except Fluorine).
9. Give the characteristics of Hydrides of Halogens

(Hydrogen halides).
Hydrides of the Halogens (Hydrogen halides): (any five)
1. All halogens react with hydrogen to form volatile covalent hydrides of HX.
2. These hydrides are called hydracids.
3. Hydracids are the reducing agents.
4. Except HF, all hydrogen halides are gases. HF is a liquid because of
intermolecular hydrogen bonding. H – F...... H –F...... H–F...... H–F.
5. Acidic characters of HX are in the following order.HF <HCl<HBr<HΙ.
ss***{Page 31 of 258}***ss
4. d -BLOCK ELEMENTS
1. The general electronic configuration of d-block elements is
a) (n-1)d1-10 ns0-2 b) (n-1) d1-5 ns2 c) (n-1)d0ns1 d) None of these
2. Formation of coloured ions is possible when compounds contains
a) Paired electrons b) unpaired electrons
c) Lone pairs of electrons d) none of the above
3. Para magnetism is common in
a) p-block elements b) d-block elements
c) s-block elements d) f-block elements
4. The colour of Ti(H2O)6 ion is due
3+
a) d-d transistion b) Presence of water molecules

c) Inter atomic transfer of electrons d) None of the above
5. The electronic configuration of chromium is
a) 3d6 4s0 b) 3d5 4s1 c) 3d4 4s2 d) 3d3 4s2 4p1
6. Para magnetism is the property of
a) Paired electrons b) completely filled electronic subshells
c) Unpaired electrons d) completely vacant electronic subshells
7. d-block elements form coloured ions because
a) They absorb some energy for d-s transition
b) They absorb some energy for p-d transition
c) They absorb some energy for d-d transition
ss***{Page 32 of 258}***ss
d) They do not absorb any energy
8. The correct electronic configuration of copper atom is
a) 3d10 4s1 b) 3d10 4s2 c) 3d9 4s2 d) 3d5 4s2 4p4
9. Copper is extracted from
a) Cuprite b) copper glance c) malachite d) copper pyrites
10. Silver salt used in photography is
a) AgCl b) AgNO3 c) AgF d) AgBr
11. Sodiumthiosulphate is used in photography because of its
a) Oxidizing behavior b) Reducing behavior
c) Complexing behavior d) photochemical behaviour
12. Excess of sodium hydroxide reacts with zinc to form
a) Zn H2 b) Na2 ZnO2 c) ZnO d) Zn(OH)2
13. Which of the following compounds will not give positive chromyl chloride test?
a) CuCl2 b) HgCl2 c) ZnCl2 d) C6 H5Cl
14. Which of the ions will give colourless aqueous solution?
a) Ni2+ b) Fe2+ c) Cu2+ d) Cu+
15. Which of the following compounds is not coloured?
a) Na2 CuCl4 b) Na2 CdI4 c) K4[Fe(CN)6] d)K3[Fe(CN)6]
16. In the extraction of Cu, the reaction which does not take place in the Bessemer
converter is
a) 2CuFeS2 + O2→Cu2S + FeS + SO2 b) 2Cu2S + 3O2→2Cu2O + 2SO2
c) 2Cu2O + Cu2S →6Cu + SO2 d) 2FeS + 3O2→2FeO + 2SO2
17. Select the wrong statement
a) All cuprous salts are blue in colour
b) Transition metals are highly reactive
c) All cuprous salts are white in colour d) Mercury is a liquid metal
18. Choose the wrong statement regarding K2Cr2O7
a) It is a powerful oxidizing agent b) It is used in tanning industry
c) It is soluble in water d) It reduces ferric sulphate to ferrous sulphate
19. For a transistion metal ion, the effective magnetic moment in BM is given by the
formula
a)√n(n-1) b) √ n(n +1) c) √ n(n +2) d) √ n(n -1)(n -2)
20. The correct statement in respect of d-block elements is
a) They are all metals. b) They show variable valency.
c) They form coloured ions and complex salts.
d) All above statement are correct.
21. Which compound is formed when excess of KCN is added to an aqueous solution
of copper sulphate
a) Cu2(CN)2 b) K2[Cu(CN)6 c) K[Cu(CN)2] d)Cu2(CN)2+(CN)2
22. Which of the following has the maximum number of unpaired electrons?
a) Mn2+ b) Ti3+ c) V3+ d) Fe2+
23. Among the following statement, the incorrect one is
ss***{Page 33 of 258}***ss
a) Calamine and siderite are carbonates.
b) Argentite and cuprite are oxides.
c) Zinc blende and pyrites are sulphides.
d) Malachite and azurite are ores of Cu
24. The chemical composition of slag formed during the smelting process in the
extraction of copper is
a) Cu2O + FeS b) FeSiO3 c) CuFeS2 d) Cu2S + FeO
25. The transition element with the lowest atomic number is
a) Scandium b) Titanium c) Zinc d) Lanthanum
26. Which transition element show highest oxidation state
a) Sc b) Ti c) Os d) Zn
1. The catalyst used in the manufacture of polythene is _________
a) V2O5 b)Fe c)Pt d)TiCl4
2. Spitting of silver can be prevented by covering the molten metal with __
a) Sodium carbonate b)Charcoal c) Calcium chloride d)Calamine
3. Bordeaux mixture is a mixture of _________
a) Copper sulphate and lime b)K2Cr2O7 + H2SO4
b) Silver nitrate and sodium chloride d) K2CrO4 + H2SO4
4. Which of the following pairs have almost equal atomic radii?
a) Mo,W b)Y,La c)Zr,Hf d)Nb,Ta
5. The substance used in making ruby, red glass and high of class pottery is
a) Colloid silver b)Purple of cassius c)Ruby silver d)Ruby copper
6. The metal used in galvanizing iron sheets is _______
a) Chromium b)Zinc c)Copper d)Silver
7. K2Cr2O7 reacts with KI and dil.sulphuric acid and liberates ____________
a) O2 b)I2 c)H2 d)SO2
8. Ferrochrome is an alloy of ____________
a) Cr,C,Fe,Ni b)Cr,Co,Ni,C c)Fe,Cr d)Cr,Ni,Fe
9. The colour of purple of cassius is ______________
a) Purple b) blue c) bluish green d) apple green
10. Silver obtained from silver coin is purified by fusion with _________
a) AgNO3 b)HNO3 c)H2SO4 d)Borax
11. The number of unpaired electrons in Ti is 1. Its magnetic moment in BM is__
3+
a) 1.414 b)2 c)1.732 d)3

12. A metal which precipitates gold from its auro cyanide complex is ____
a) Cr b)Ag c)Pt d)Zn
13. The reagent which is added first in the separation of silver from silver coin is _
ss***{Page 34 of 258}***ss
a) Con.H2SO4 b) con.HCl c) Con.HNO3 d) aqua regia.
14. If the magnetic moment value is 5.92BM, the number of unpaired electrons is_
a) 5 b) 3 c) 4 d) 6
15. Which of the following will have maximum magnetic moment?
a) 3d2 b) 3d6 c) 3d7 d) 3d9
16. The metals presents in Nichrome alloy.
a) Cr, Ni, Fe b) Cr,Co,Ni c) Cr,Fe d) Cr,Fe,Cu
17. The most malleable and ductile of all metals is_____
a) Silver b) Gold c) Copper d) Zinc
18. A’d’ block metal ion has a magnetic moment of 1.732 BM.The numbers of
unpaired electrons?
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
19. Purity of blister copper is -----
a) 100% b) 98% c) 90% d) 12%
20. The alloy used in the manufacture of resistance wire is
a) Ferro-chrome b) Bronze c) Nichrome d) Stellite
21. In metal carbonyl the oxidation state of metal is
a) 0 b) +2 c) +4 d) +6
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 35 & 36 }

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Why do d-block elements exhibit variable oxidation state? (D.Q, Oct-2006,
Mar -2007, July-2007, Mar-2009, Mar-2011, Mar-2013, Jun – 2014,15).
 These elements have several (n – 1) d and ns electrons.
 The energies of (n – 1) d and ns orbitals are fairly close to each other.
2. Why do d-block elements form more complexes?(D.Q,July-2006,Sep

2007,June2008,June-2009,Mar-2010,July-10,Sep-10,Mar-12,14,15)
 Small size and high positive charge density.
 Presence of vacant (n-1)d orbitals which are of appropriate energy to
accept lone pair and unshared pair of electrons from the ligands for
bonding with them. Examples: [Fe(CN)6]4-.
3. What is chrome plating?(Oct-2006, Mar-2008,Mar-2010)

Anode: Lead plate.
Cathode: Article to be plated.
ss***{Page 35 of 258}***ss
Electrolytes: Chromic acid + con. H2SO4.
During electrolysis chromium deposits on the article (cathode).
Before Chrome plating - articles are first plated with nickel.
4. What is spitting of silver? How it is prevented? (Sep-2007, Oct-2008, July-

2010,June-2011,Mar - 2015)
 Molten silver absorbs about twenty times its volume of oxygen which it
again expels on cooling. Globules of molten silver are thrown off. This is called
“spitting of silver”.
 This can be prevented by covering the molten metal with a layer of
charcoal.
5. What is aguaregia? Give the reaction of gold with aqua regia? (Mar-
2007,June-2011,Mar-2011,Mar-2014)
Aquaregia is (3 parts of con.HCl + 1 part of con.HNO3)
Gold dissolves in aquaregia to form auric chloride.
2Au + 9 HCl + 3HNO3→ 2AuCl3 + 6H2O + 3NOCl
Auric chloride Nitrosyl chloride.
6. K2Cr2O7 is powerful oxidizing agent explains. Give two examples (July-2006)
i) It liberates I2 from KI
K2Cr2O7 + 7H2SO4 + 6KI → 4 K2SO4 + Cr2 (SO4)3 + 3 I2 + 7H2O
ii) It oxidises ferrous to ferric salt
K2Cr2O7 + 7H2SO4 + 6 FeSO4→ K2SO4 + Cr2 (SO4)3 + 3 Fe2 (SO4)3+ 7H2O.
7.What is the action of heat on copper sulphate?(Mar-08,Jun-12, oct-14,jun15)
8. Why transition metal ions are colored? (Oct-2009,Sep-2011)

 Due to the presence of unpaired electrons in it.
 The energy gap between two energy levels in the same d-subshell being
small.
 Very small amount of energy is required for excitation of electrons from
one energy level to the other.
ss***{Page 36 of 258}***ss
 The energy can be easily provided by the visible light.
 The colour observed corresponds to the complementary colour of the light
absorbed.
9. Write a note on chromyl chloride test.(Mar-2009,Mar-2012, Jun - 2014)
K2Cr2O7 + 4KCl + 6H2SO4 → 2CrO2Cl2 + 6 KHSO4 + 3H2O

Chromyl chloride
This reaction is used in the detection of chloride ions in qualitative analysis.
10. Why Mn2+ is more stable than Mn3+? (Mar-2006, Jun-2012,)

 Mn (Z= 25), Mn+2 – 3d5 (half-filled leads to symmetry)
 Mn+3 – 3d4 (partially filled leads to asymmetry)
 Half-filled is more stable than partially filled d-orbitals.
 Hence, Mn2+ is more stable than Mn3+.
11. A substance is found to have magnetic moment of 3.9BM.How many

unpaired electron does it contain?(Mar-2006)
μ = √n (n+2) μ = 3.9 BM
√n (n+2) = 3.9
Squares on both side.
n2 + 2n = 15
n2 + 2n – 15 = 0
(n + 5) (n – 3) = 0
n = - 5, n = +3.
Number of unpaired electron is 3.
12. Explain the electrolytic refining of copper? (July-2007)

Anode: A block of impure copper metal.
Cathode: A thin plate of pure copper metal.
Electrolyte: CuSO4 + H2SO4
During electrolysis pure copper get deposited on the cathode.
13. What is the reaction of copper sulphate with KCN? (July-2008)

CuSO4 + 2KCN → Cu(CN)2 + K2SO4
2Cu(CN)2 → Cu2(CN)2 + (CN)2
Cyanogen
14. What is the reaction of Zinc on hot solution of NaOH? (Oct-08)
Zn + 2NaOH + →Na2ZnO2 + H2O
(Sodium zincate)
ss***{Page 37 of 258}***ss
15. Why do Zn2+ salts colorless while Ni2+ salts are colored? (June-2009, Oct-
2012, Jun -13).
 Ni2+ - 3d8and Zn2+ - 3d10.
 Because of presence of unpaired electron in outer d-orbital in Ni2+ and
absence of unpaired electron in outer d-orbital in Zn2+.
16. What happens when KI solution is added to an aqueous solution of copper

sulphate? (Oct-2009)
CuSO4 + 2KI → CuI2 + K2SO4
(Unstable)
2CuI2 → Cu2I2 + I2
(White ppt)
17. What is purple of cassius? How it is used? (Sep-2011)

Purple of cassius is only a form of colloidal gold. It is purple or red in
colour and after the name of Cassius who discovered it.
Preparation:
2AuCl3 + 3SnCl2 → 2Au↑ + 3SnCl4
The gold thus precipitated is adsorbed by stannic hydroxide formed by
the hydrolysis of SnCl4.
SnCl4 + 4H2O→ Sn(OH)4 + 4HCl
Uses:
It is used in making ruby-red glass and high class pottery.
18. What is Lunar caustic? How it is prepared? (Oct-2012)

Silver nitrate (AgNO3) is called Lunar caustic.
Preparation:
3Ag + 4HNO3 → 3AgNO3 + 2H2O + NO↑
19. What is the action of heat on AgNO3?(Oct-2013)
IMPORTANT:
1. How d-block elements are classified?
i) 3d series or First transition series (21Sc to 30Zn)
ii) 4d series or Second transition series (39Y to 48Cd)
ss***{Page 38 of 258}***ss
iii) 5d series or Third transition series (57La and 72Hf to 80Hg)
iv) 6d series or Fourth transition series (89Ac and 104Rf to 112) or incomplete
series.
2. Why d- block elements do are formed alloys?
Because they have almost similar size and the atoms of one metal can
easily take up positions in the crystal lattice of the other.
Eg. Alloys of Cr-Ni.
3. Give reason for catalytic properties of transition elements.(oct – 2014)
 They show a variety of oxidation states and thereby can form intermediate
products with various reactants.
 They are also capable of forming interstitial compounds which can adsorb
and activate the reacting species.
 Example: TiCl4 is employed as a catalyst in the manufacture of polythene.
4. Why does Mn (II) show maximum paramagnetic character among the

bivalent ions of the first transition series?
Because of presence of more number (5) unpair electrons in d- orbital
in Mn+2.
5. [Ti(H2O)6]3+ is coloured while [Sc(H2O)6]3+is colourless. Explain.
Because, presence of unpaired electron in d- orbital (3d1) in Ti+3 in
[Ti(H2O)6]3+.
Absence of unpaired electron in d- orbital (3d0) in Sc+3 in [Sc(H2O)6]3+.
6. Explain why the melting and boiling points of Zn, Cd, Hg are low?
Because of completely filled d-orbital in Zn, Cd, Hg.,and absence of
unpaired electrons in d- orbital of Zn, Cd, Hg.
7. Name the first and last element in the second transition series.
Yttrium (Y) and Cadmium (Cd).
8. Write two alloys of copper and their uses.
ss***{Page 39 of 258}***ss
9. Name the lightest and the heaviest elements (in terms of density) among the
transition elements.
Lightest element: Scandium (Sc).
Heaviest element: Osmium (Os) and Iridium (Ir).
10. Which of the following ions would form colourless complexes? Cu2+, Zn2+,
Ti3+, Ti4+, Cd2+.
Ans: Zn2+, Ti4+, Cd2+.
11. Why there is a slight variation in the atomic radii from Cr to Cu?
The atomic radii of first transition series decreases from Sc to Cr and
remains almost constant till Cu and then increases towards the end. This can be
explained based on two effects namely screening and the nuclear charge
effect. These two effects oppose each other resulting in increase in nuclear
charge. Hence very slight variation in the atomic radii from Cr to Cu is observed.
12. Explain the action of moist air on copper?

Copper gets covered with a green layer of basic copper carbonate, in the
presence of CO2 and moisture
2Cu + O2 + CO2 + H2O → Cu (OH)2. CuCO3
(Green) Copper Carbonate.
13. What is philosopher’s wool? How it is prepared?
Zinc is heated in air at 773 K; it burns to form a white cloud of Zinc oxide
which settles to form a wooly flock called philosopher’s wool.
2Zn + O2 →2ZnO
14. What happens when K2Cr2O7 is heated? Give the balanced equation.
4K2Cr2O7 → 4K2CrO4 + 2Cr2O3 + 3O2.
ss***{Page 40 of 258}***ss
15. What is Blue vitriol? How it is prepared?

Copper Sulphate (CuSO4.5H2O) is called Blue Vitriol.
Preparation
In laboratory it is prepared by dissolving cupric oxide (or) cupric
hydroxide (or) cupric carbonate in dilute H2SO4
CuO + H2SO4 → CuSO4 + H2O
Cu(OH)2 + H2SO4 → CuSO4 + 2H2O
CuCO3 + H2SO4 → CuSO4 + H2O + CO2↑
16. What is Bordeaux mixture? Give its use.
A mixture of copper sulphate and lime, commonly known as
Bordeaux mixture, is used as fungicide.
17. What is calamine? How it is prepared?
Zinc carbonate (ZnCO3) occurs in nature as calamine.
Preparation: ZnSO4 + 2NaHCO3 → ZnCO3 + Na2SO4 + H2O + CO2↑
III. Five Mark Question & Answer: { Q.No. 53}
1. Explain the extraction of Zinc from its ore.

Extraction of zinc:
(1). Ores:
Zinc blende, (ZnS)
(2). Concentration -Froth-floatation.
(3). Roasting (at 1200 K): 2 ZnS + 3O2 →2ZnO + 2SO2
(4). Reduction: (at 1673K): ZnO + C → Zn + CO
(5). Electrolytic refining:
Anode – Impure Zinc, Cathode – Pure Zinc
Electrolyte – ZnSO4 + dil.H2SO4
2. Explain the extraction of Chromium from its ore by Alumino thermic

process?
Extraction of Chromium from chromite ore:
Ores: Chromite (FeO Cr2O3)
1. Concentration- gravity separation.
Aluminothermic process:
ss***{Page 41 of 258}***ss
1. BaO2 + Mg Powder 2. Fireclay crucible

3. Magnesium ribbon, 4. Sand 5. Cr2O3 + Al
 Cr2O3 + powdered Al (ratio 3:1) is placed in a large fire clay crucible.

 (BaO2+ Mg powder) is placed over this. The crucible is surrounded by sand
which prevents loss of heat by radiation.
 The mixture is ignited by a piece of Mg ribbon .large amount of heat is
liberated, in which Cr2O3 is reduced to chromium.
 The molten chromium is collected in the crucible and aluminium oxide is
removed as slag.
Cr2O3 + 2Al →2Cr + Al2O3 + 468.6 kJ
3. Explain the extraction of Silver from its ore.

Extraction of silver:( Mac-Arthur and Forrest’s cyanide process).
1. Ores: Argentite or silver glance( Ag2S )
2. Concentration- froth-floatation process.
3. Treatment of the ore with NaCN.
Ag2S + 4NaCN 2Na [Ag(CN)2] + Na2S
(0.4-0.6%) Sodium argento cyanide
(soluble)
4. Precipitation of silver:
2Na [Ag(CN)2] + Zn → Na2[Zn(CN)4] + 2Ag↓
5. Electrolytic refining
Anode – Impure Silver Cathode – Pure Silver
Electrolyte – AgNO3 + 1% HNO3
On passing electricity pure silver gets deposited at the cathode.
4. Explain the extraction of Gold from its ore.

Ores:
Alluvial sand or gravel.
Extraction from Gold Ores (sulphide or telluride) - Mac Arthur Forrest
Cyanide Process.
ss***{Page 42 of 258}***ss
i) Crushing, grinding and concentration:
The gold ore is crushed and powdered, and then concentrated by froth
floatation process.
ii) Roasting:
Impurities of (S, As, Te) + air (oxygen) → Volatile oxide of(S, As, Te)
iii) Treatment with KCN:
The finely powdered roasted ore is taken in large vats made up of
cement or iron and having false wooden bottoms with holes.
4Au + 8KCN + 2H2O + O2 → 4K[Au(CN)2] + 4KOH
(0.5%) Pot. aurocyanide
iv) Precipitation of gold:
2K[Au(CN2] + Zn →K2[Zn(CN)4] + 2 Au↓
v) Electrolytic refining:
Anode-Impure Gold
Cathode- Pure Gold
Electrolyte-AuCl3 + (10-12%) HCl
On passing current pure gold gets deposited on the cathode.
5. Explain the preparation of Potassium dichromate from chromite ore.

Preparation of potassium dichromate from chrome iron ore:
Step- I:( Conversion of chrome iron ore to sodium chromate):

4FeO.Cr2O3 + 8Na2CO3 + 7O2 → 8Na2CrO4 + 2Fe2O3 + 8CO2↑
(sodium chromate)
Step – II: (Conversion of Na2CrO4 to Na2Cr2O7 ):

2Na2CrO4 + H2SO4 → Na2Cr2O7 + Na2SO4 + H2O
(sodium dichromate)
Step- III: (sodium dichromate into potassium dichromate):

Na2Cr2O7 + 2KCl → K2Cr2O7 + 2NaCl
(Potassium dichromate)
Potassium dichromate, being much less soluble than sodium salt,
crystallizes out on cooling.
6. Explain the extraction of Silver from Silver coins.

Extraction of silver from silver coins:
1). Silver coins ( Ag-Cu alloys) + HNO3 → AgNO3 and Cu(NO3)2 (solution)
2). The solution is boiled to expel excess of nitric acid,
3). Solution +con.HCl → AgCl↓ + CuCl2.
Precipitate solution
AgCl is separated.Then,
ss***{Page 43 of 258}***ss
4). 4AgCl + 2Na2CO3 → 4Ag↓+ 4NaCl + 2CO2 + O2
5). Silver is purified by fusion with borax and followed by Electrolytic
purification.
5. F-BLOCK ELEMENTS
1. The electronic configuration of Lanthanides is
a) [Xe]4f0 5d0 6s0 b) [Xe] 4f1-7 5d1 6s1
c) [Xe]4f1-14 5d1 6s2 d) [Xe]4f1-14 5d1-10 6s2
2. The electronic configuration of Actinides is
a) [Rn]5f0-14 6d0 7s0 b) [Rn]5f0-14 6d0-2 7s0
c) [Rn]5f0-14 6d0-7 7s1 d) [Rn]5f0-14 6d0-2 7s2
3. The lanthanide contraction is responsible for the fact that
a) Zn and Y have about the same radius
b) Zr and Nb have similar oxidation state
c) Zr and Hf have about the same radius
d) Zr and Zn have same oxidation state
4. The most common oxidation state of lanthanides is
a) +2 b) +1 c) +3 d) +4
5. Lanthanides are extracted from
a) Limonite b) Monazite c) Magnetite d) Cassiterite
6. The elements in which the extra electron enters (n-2)f orbitals are called
a) s-block elements b)-p block elements
c) d-block elements d)-f block elements
7. The Lanthanides contraction is due to
a) Perfect shielding of 4f electron b) Imperfect shielding of 4f electron
c) Perfect shielding of 3d electron d) Imperfect shielding of 3d electron
8. Ceria is used in
a) toys b) tracer bullets c) gas lamp materials d) none of the above
9. _______is used in gas lamp material
a) MnO2 b) CeO2 c) N2O5 d) Fe2O3
10. Alloys of Lanthanides are called as
a) Mish-metals b) Metalloids c) Plate metals d) Actinides
ss***{Page 44 of 258}***ss
11. Metallothermic processes involving Lanthanides are called as
a) Aluminothermic process b) Lanthanido-thermic process
c) Reduction process d) Oxidation process
12. _______form oxocations
a) Lanthanides b) Actinides c) Noble gases d) Alkalimetals
13. Maximum oxidation state exhibited by Lanthanides is
a) +1 b) +2 c) +3 d) +4
14. Lanthanides are separated by
a) Fractional distillation b) Steam distillation
c) Fractional Crystallization d) Sublimation
1. The fuel in nuclear power plant is__________
a) U-235 b) Pu-238 c) CeO2 d) Np-238
2. Which of the following form oxocation?
a) Lanthanides b) actinides c) noble gases d) alkali metals
3. The isotope used in nuclear fission reaction?
a) Copper b) uranium c) lead d) radium
4. The most common oxidation state among actinides is________
a) +4 b) +2 c) +3 d) +1
5. ____________ is used as a power source is long mission space probes.
a) U-235 b) U-232 c) Pu-238 d) Pu-241
6. _____________ is the oxidation state of U in UF6.
a) +6 b) +4 c) +3 d) 0
7. ThO2 is used in _______________
a) Toys b) tracer bullets c) gas lamp materials d) dyeing cotton
8. Among the lanthanide elements, with the increase in atomic number the tendency
to act as reducing agent________________
a) Increase b) decreases c) no change d) none of these
9. According to Fajan’s rule decrease in size of Ln3+ ion in Ln(OH)3
a) Increase the covalent character’s b) decrease the covalent character’s
c) increase the basic character d) increase the ionic character
10. The radioactive lanthanide is____________
a) Lanthanum b) Promethium c) Gadolinium d) Terbium
11. Which is used in gas lamp materials?
a) Ceria b) Thoria c) Mish metal d) Both (a) & (b)
12. Which of the following lanthanides have no partly filled 4f sub shell but have
electrons in 5d sub shell
a) Ce b) Lu c) Pm d) Nd
ss***{Page 45 of 258}***ss
13. The oxidation state of Uranium in UO2 Cl2 is
a) +2 b) +4 c) +5 d) +6
14.The Actinide contraction is due to
a) Perfect shielding of 5f electron b) Imperfect shielding of 4f electron
c) Imperfect shielding of 5f electron d) Perfect shielding of 4f electron
III. Five Mark Question & Answer: { Q.No. 54 }
1. Explain the lanthanide contraction its causes and consequences.
Lanthanide Contraction -
Steady decrease in ionic radii of M3+cations in the lanthanide series.
Causes : Due to,

(i) Imperfect shielding of one 4f electron by another in the same sub shell.
(ii) Effective nuclear charge increases in lanthanide series.
Consequences of lanthanide contraction:

i) Basicity of ions
Due to lanthanide contraction, the size of Ln3+ ions decreases regularly with
increase in atomic number. According to Fajan’s rule, decrease in size of Ln3+
ions increase the covalent character and decreases the basic character
between Ln3+ and OH- ion in Ln (OH)3. Since the order of size of Ln3+ ions are
La3+> Ce3+ ............... >Lu3+
ii) There is regular decrease in their ionic radii.
iii) Regular decrease in their tendency to act as reducing agent, with increase
in atomic number.
iv)Second and third rows of d-block transition elements are quite close in
properties.
v) Lanthanides are occur together in natural minerals and are difficult to
separate.
2. Compare lanthanides with actinides.

ss***{Page 46 of 258}***ss
S.No. LANTHANIDES ACTINIDES
1. Ions are colourless. Ions are coloured U3+(red),
2. Do not form complexes. Form complexes.
3. Except promethium, they All of them are radioactive.

are non-radioactive.
4. Compounds are less basic More basic
5. Do not form oxocations. Form oxocations. (UO+)
3. How are lanthanides extracted from monazite sand?

Flow sheet: Extraction of lanthanide from monazite sand:
ss***{Page 47 of 258}***ss
4. Give the uses of lanthanides and actinides.

Use of lanthanides:
1. A pyrophoric (La, Nd, Fe, Al, Ca, C and Si ) alloy - used in cigarette lighters,
toys, flame throwing tanks & tracer bullets.
2. Ceria (CeO2) &thoria (ThO2) - used in gas lamp materials.
3. Cerium salts -dyeing cotton, lead storage batteries and as catalyst.
4.Lanthanido thermic process –to get pure metals. ( Fe,Co,Ni, etc..)
5. Mish – metals – production of steel like heat resistant, stainless and
instrumental steel.
Uses of Actinides:
1. U235 - fuel in nuclear power plants and component in nuclear weapons.
2. Pu238- power source in long mission space probes.
6. CO-ORDINATION COMPOUNDS
ss***{Page 48 of 258}***ss
1. Which a double salt
a) K2SO4.Al2(SO4)3.24H2O b) NaCl c) K4[Fe(CN)6] d) KCl
2. An example of a complex compound having coordination number 4.
a) K4[Fe(CN)6] b) [Co(en)3]Cl3 c) [Fe(H2O)6]Cl3 d) [Cu(NH3)4]Cl2
3. The geometry of [Cu(NH3)4]2+ complex ion
a) Linear b) Tetrahedral c) Square planar d) Angular
4. An example of a chelating ligand is
a) NO2- b) Chloro c) Bromo d) en
5. The geometry of complex ion [Fe(CN)6] is 4-
a) tetrahedral b) square planar c) Octahedral d) triangular

6. The oxidation number of Nickel in the complex ion, [NiCl4]2- is
a) +1 b) -1 c) +2 d) -2
7. Which is not an anionic complex?
a) [Cu(NH3)4]Cl2 b) K4[Fe(CN)6] c) K3[Fe(CN)6] d) [NiCl4]2-
8. The geometry of [Ni(CN)4]2- is
a) Tetrahedral b) Square planar c) Triangular d) Octahedral
9. An example of an ambidentate ligand is
a) CN¯ b) Cl¯ c) NO2¯ d) en
10. [FeF6] is paramagnetic because
4-
a) F- is a weaker ligand b) F- is a strong ligand

c) F- is a flexidentate ligand d) F- is a chelating ligand
11. In [FeII(CN)6]4-, the central metal ion is
a) Fe b) Fe+2 c) Fe+3 d) CN-
12. The coordination number of Ni(II) in [Ni(CN)4]2- is
a) 2 b) 4 c) 5 d) 6
13. The name of [Pt (NH3)2Cl2] is
IV 2+
a) Diamminedichloroplatinum(IV) ion
b) Diamminedichloroplanitate(IV)
c) Diamminedichloroplatinum
d) Dichlorodiammineplatinum(IV) ion
14. For a compound K4[Fe(CN)6] →4K+ + [Fe(CN)6]4-, the complex ion is

a) K+ b) CN- c) FeII d) [Fe(CN)6]4-
15. A metal ion from the first transition series forms an octahedral complex with
magnetic moment of 4.9 BM and another octahedral complex which is
diamagnetic. The metal ion is
a) Fe2+ b) Co2+ c) Mn2+ d) Ni2+
16. Paramagnetic moment is expressed in
a) Debye unit b) K Joules c) BM d) ergs
ss***{Page 49 of 258}***ss
17. The type of isomerism found in the complexes [Co(NO2)(NH3)5]SO4 and
[Co(SO4)(NH3)5]NO2
a) Hydrate isomerism b) Coordination isomerism
c) Linkage isomerism d) Ionisation
18. Valence bond theory does not explain the property of complex compound
a) Geometry b) magnetic c) nature of ligand d) colour

1. The type of isomerism found in the complexes. [Pt(NH3)4][CuCl4] and
[Cu(NH3)][PtCl4]is
a) Ionization isomerism b)Co-Ordination isomerism c)
linkage isomerism d) ligand isomerism
2. Which of the following is cationic complex?
a) K4[Fe(CN)6] b) [Cu(NH3)4]Cl2 c) K3[Cr(C2O4)3] d) K3[Fe(CN)6
3. The co-ordination number of Cr (III) in [Cr(H2O)4Cl2]. 2H2O is___
a) 3 b) 4 c) 6 d) 2
4. An example of bidentate Chelating ligand is________________
a) b) c) en d)
5. The co-ordination number of Nickel in the complex ion [Ni(CN)4]2- is___
a) 1 b) 4 c) 2 d) 6
6. Chlorophyll is a ------------- complex.
a) Magnesium - Porphyrin b) Iron - Porphyrin
c) Copper - Porphyrin d) Nickel - Porphyrin
III. & IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 55 & 65 (a) }
MORE IMPORTANT
1. Explain (a) Co – ordination Isomerism (b) Ionization Isomerism.
a) Coordination isomerism
In a bimetallic complex, both complex cation and complex anion
may be present. In which distribution of ligands between the two
coordination spheres can vary.
Example:
[Co(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6] and [Cr(NH3)6] [Co(CN)6]
b) Ionisation isomerism
Coordination compounds having the same molecular formula but
forming different ions in solution.
Eample:
[Co(NH3)5Br]SO4 and [Co(NH3)5SO4]Br
ss***{Page 50 of 258}***ss
2. Explain (a) Hydrate Isomerism (b) Linkage Isomerism.

(a) Hydrate isomerism or Solvate isomerism
The best known examples of this type of isomerism occur for chromium
chloride “CrCl3.6H2O”which may contain 4, 5, (or) 6 coordinated water
molecules. Example:1
1. [Cr(H2O)4Cl2]Cl.2H2O - Bright green.2. [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2.H2O - grey-green.
3. [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3 – Violet.
(b) Linkage isomerism
Linkage isomerism occurs with ambidentate ligands. These ligands are
capable of coordinating in more than one way. Example:1
[Co(NH3)5ONO]Cl2 the nitrito isomer - red colour (O – attached )
[Co(NH3)5 NO2]Cl2 the nitro isomer - yellow colour (N – attached)
3. Give the postulates of Werner’s theory.
Postulates of Werner’s theory:

1) Metal atom has two types of valencies
i) Primary valency or ionisable valency
ii) Secondary valency or non ionisable valency
2)Primary valency corresponds to the oxidation state of the metal ion. It is
always satisfied by negative ions.
3) Secondary valency corresponds to the coordination number of the metal ion
or atom.It may be satisfied by either negative ions or neutral molecules.
4)Molecules or ion that satisfies secondary valencies are called ligands.
5) Secondary valencies - directional in nature .
Primary valencies -non-directional in nature.
6) The ligands have unshared pair of electrons. These unshared pair of Electrons
is donated to central metal ion or atom in a compound. Such Compounds are
called coordination compounds.
4. Give any five postulates of Valence Bond (VB) theory.

The postulates of valence bond theory
1) The central metal atom/ion makes available a number of vacant Orbitals
equal to its coordination number.
2) These vacant orbitals form covalent bonds with the ligand orbitals.
3) A covalent bond is formed by the overlap of a vacant metal orbital and
filled ligand orbitals. This complete overlap leads to the formation of a metal
ligand, σ (sigma) bond.
4) A strong covalent bond is formed only when the orbitals overlap to the
maximum extent. This maximum overlapping is possible only when the
metal vacant orbitals undergo a process called ‘hybridization’. A
ss***{Page 51 of 258}***ss
hybridized orbital has better directional characteristics than an
unhybridized one.
5) Coordination number Hybridization Geometry
6 d2sp3 octahedral
5. Explain the hybridization, shape, magnetic properties of
(a) [Ni(NH3)4]2+ (b) [Ni (CN)4]2-.
(a). [Ni(NH3)4]2+ : Nickel atom , Outer electronic con
(b) [Ni(CN)4]2- :
S.No Content [Ni(NH3)4]2+ [Ni(CN)4]2-

1. Unpaired 2 Zero
electrons
2. Magnetic 2.83BM Zero
moment
3. Hybridization sp3 dsp2
4. Geometry Tetrahedral. Square planar.
5. Magnetic Paramagnetic Diamagnetic
character
ss***{Page 52 of 258}***ss
6. Strength NH3 - Weak ligand CN- - Strong ligand
6. Explain the hybridization, shape, magnetic properties of

(a) [FeF6]4- (b) [Fe (CN)6]4-
(a) [FeF6]4- ; Fe atom, Outer electronic configuration 3d6 4s2.
(b) [Fe (CN)6]4-:
S.No Content [FeF6]4- [Fe(CN)6]4-

1. Unpaired 4 Zero
electrons
2. Magnetic 4.90BM Zero
moment
3. Hybridization sp3d2 d2sp3
ss***{Page 53 of 258}***ss
4. Geometry Octahedral Octahedral
5. Magnetic Paramagnetic Diamagnetic
character
6. Strength F- - Weak ligand CN- - Strong ligand
7. Write the name, central metal ion, ligand, co-ordination number and
geometry of the following complexes.(a) K4[Fe(CN)6] ; (b) [Cu(NH3)4]SO4.
S.No Content K4[Fe(CN)6] [Cu(NH3)4]SO4

1. Name Potassiumhexacyano Tetraammine
ferrate(II) copper(II) sulphate
2. Central metal Fe2+ Cu2+
ion
3. Ligand Cyano (or) CN- ammine (or) NH3
4. Co-ordination six (6) Four (4)
number
5. Geometry Octahedral Square planar
8. Write the name, central metal ion, ligand, co-ordination number and
geometry of the following complexes.(a) K3[Cr(C2O4)3]3H2O ; (b)
[Co(NH3)6]Cl3.
S.No Content K3[Cr(C2O4)3]3H2O [Co(NH3)6]Cl3

1. Name Potassiumtris(oxalato) HexaammineCobalt
chromate(III)trihydrate (III) Chloride
2. Central metal Cr3+ Co3+
ion
3. Ligand Oxalato (or) C2O42- ammine (or) NH3
4. Co-ordination Six (6) Six (6)
number
5. Geometry Octahedral Octahedral
9. Write notes on function of hemoglobin in Bio-system.
Function of hemoglobin:
1). Hemoglobin in the red blood cells carries oxygen from the lungs to the
tissues.
2). It delivers the oxygen molecule to myoglobin in the tissues.
3). When the oxygen has been released for cell respiration,
ss***{Page 54 of 258}***ss
4). Hemoglobin loses its bright red colour and becomes purple.
5). It then combines with the waste carbon dioxide produced by the cells and
deposits in the lungs so that the gas can be exhaled.
7. NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY
1. The phenomenon of radioactivity was discovered by
a) Madam Curie b) Pierre curie c) Henry Becquerrel d) Rutherford
2. Themost penetrating radiations are
a) α rays b) βrays c)  rays d) all are equally penetrating
3. In the nuclear reaction, 92U238→82Pb206, the numbers of αand βparticles emitted
are
a) 7α, 5β b) 6α, 4β c) 4α, 3β d) 8α, 6β
4. Which one of the following particles is used to bombard 13Al27 to give15P30 and a
neutron?
a) α particle b) deuteron c) proton d) neutron
5. The reaction5B →4Be takes place due to
8 8
a) α decay b) βdecay c) electron capture d) positron decay

6. Radioactivity is due to
a) Stable electronic configuration b) Stable nucleus
c) Unstable nucleus d) unstable electronic configuration
7. In the following radioactive decay, 92X →89Y , how many α and β particles are
232 220
ejected?
a) 3α and 3β b) 5αand 3β c) 3αand 5β d) 5αand 5β
8. 92U nucleus absorbs a neutron and disintegrates into 54Xe139, 38Sr94 and X. What
235
will be the product X?

a) 3 neutrons b) 2 neutrons c) αparticle d) βparticle
9. Loss of a β-particle is equivalent to
a) Increase of one proton only b) Decrease of one neutron only
c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of these
10. Which of the following is used as neutron absorber in the nuclear reactor?
a) Water b) Deuterium
c) Some compound of uranium d) Cadmium
1. After 24 hours 0.125g of the initial quantity 1g of a radioactive isotope is left out.
The half-life period is _________________
ss***{Page 55 of 258}***ss
a) 24 hours b) 12 hrs c) 8hrs d) cannot be determined
2. When is bombarded with a proton it gives and ____________
a) -particle b) -particle c) neutron d) Proton
3. In nuclear reaction ____________ is/are balanced on both sides.
a) Mass b) number of atoms
c) Mass number d) atomic number and mass number
4. Half-life period of a radioactive element is 1500 years. The value of disintegration
a) 0.1465x10-10 S-1 b) 0.2465x10-10S-1
c) 0.1465x10-8S-1 d) 0.3645x10-10S-1
5. Half-life period of radioactive element is 100 seconds. Its average life period is___.
a) 100 sec b) 50 sec c) 200 sec d) 144 sec
6. Half-life period of nucleus is 150 days. The average life is _____
a) 216 days b) 21.6 days c) 261 days d) 2601 days
7. -particle particle is represented as
a) +1e0 b) -1e0 c) 1H1 d) 2He4
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 37 }

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Explain the principle behind in Hydrogen bomb? (Mar-2006,10,15)
Principle behind in Hydrogen bomb
 The highly destructive hydrogen bomb is also based on the fusion reactions
of hydrogen to form helium producing large amount of energy.
 Hydrogen bomb consists of an arrangement for nuclear fission in the
centre surrounded by a mixture of deuterium (1H2) and lithium isotope
(3Li6).
 Fission reaction provides the high temperature necessary to start the
fusion. (or)
2. What are the uses of radio carbon dating?(Mar-2011)

Uses
1) Carbon dating has proved to be a great tool for correlating facts of
historical importance.
2) It is very useful in understanding the evolution of life, and rise and
fall of civilizations.
ss***{Page 56 of 258}***ss
3. Give any three differences between nuclear reaction and chemical reaction
(Oct-2006)
S.No Chemical reaction Nuclear reaction
1. It is balanced in terms of mass It balanced in terms of both mass
only. and energy.
2. Energy is expressed in terms of Energy expressed in MeV (Million
kilo joules per mole. electron volts) per individual
No new element is produced nucleus.
3. since nucleus is unaffected. New element / isotope may be
produced during the nuclear
reaction.
4. What is binding energy? (Oct-2012)

Binding energy
 Whenever a nucleus is formed, certain mass is converted into energy.
 Hence for atom, the atomic mass is lower than the sum of masses of
protons, neutrons and electrons present.
 The difference in mass is termed as “mass defect”. This is the measure of
the binding energy of proton and neutron in the nucleus.
 The relationship between mass - energy is explained by Einstein equation
ΔE = ΔmC2.
5. What is Q-value for a nuclear reaction? (July-2006)

Q-value for a nuclear reaction
The amount of energy absorbed or released during nuclear reaction is
called Q-value of nuclear reaction.
Qvalue = (mp-mr) 931 MeV
Where, mr - Sum of the masses of reactants
mp- Sum of the masses of products
ALL PROBLEMS.
IMPORTANT:
1. What is radioactivity?
Radioactivity
The phenomenon of spontaneous disintegration of certain atomic nuclei
resulting in the emission of radioactive rays is called radioactivity.
2. Define Half-life period.

Half-life period:The time required to disintegrate one half of any radioactive
substance is called half-life period (t½).
ss***{Page 57 of 258}***ss
3. What are the types of nuclear reaction? Give example for each type.
1) Spallation reaction:
2) Nuclear fission reaction:

92U235+ 0n1 →56Ba141 + 36Kr 92 + 3 0n1 + 200 MeV
3) Nuclear fusion:
EXTRA:
1. State radioactive disintegration theory.
 To explain the spontaneous decay of radioactive elements, Rutherford and
Soddy put forward the theory of radioactive disintegration.
 According to this theory the quantity of a radioactive element which
disappears in unit time is directly proportional to the amount (atoms) of
radioactive substance present at that time.
 Based on the above theory, the following equation is derived which confirms
that all radioactive reactions follow I order.
2. What is spallation reaction? (oct – 2014 )

Spallation reaction
These are the reactions in which high speed projectiles may chip a heavy
nucleus into several fragments. E.g.
3. What is nuclear fission reaction? Give example.

Nuclear fission reaction:
Nuclear fission is the process in which a heavy nucleus breaks up into two
lighter nuclei of almost equal size with the release of an enormous amount of
energy. (E.g) - 92U235+ 0n1 →56Ba141 + 36Kr92 +3 0n1 + 200 MeV
ss***{Page 58 of 258}***ss
4. What is nuclear fusion reaction? Give example.

Nuclear fusion reaction:
When lighter nuclei moving at a high speed are fused together to form a
heavy nucleus, the process is called nuclear fusion. E.g.
Problems:
1. Calculate the decay constant for Ag108 if its half-life is 2.31 minutes? (Oct-
2010,Mar-2014,jun-15)
2. Calculate the average life of 79Au198 leaving t1/2 =150 days. (Jun-2008)
3. The decay constant for 6C14 is 2.31x10-4 years-1. Calculate the half-life
period.(Oct-08)
4. Determine the average life of U238 having t1/2 = 140 days. (Jun 2010,11,Mar-
2013)
5. How many α and β particle will be emitted by an element 84A218 is changing to
a stable isotope of 82B206? (Mar-2009)
6. 92U238 undergoes a series of changes by emitting and particle α and β finally
82Pb206 is formed? Calculate the number of particle emitted during the change.
(Oct-2011)
7. Calculate the number of α and β particle emitted in the conversion of 90Th232
to 82Pb208. (Mar-2008)
8. Half-life period of a radioactive element is 100 seconds. Calculate the
disintegration constant and average life of period. How time will it take for 90
% decay? (Jun-2009)
9. Calculate the Q value of the following
nuclearreaction.13Al27+2He4→14Si30+1H1+Q.The exact mass of 13Al27 is
26.9815amu, 14 Si3, 2He4 is 4.0026amu and 1H1 is 1.0078amu. (Jun-2011,Oct-
2009)
IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q. No. 65 (b) }
1. Distinguish between Chemical and Nuclear reaction.

S. Chemical Reaction Nuclear Reaction
No
ss***{Page 59 of 258}***ss
1. Involve some loss, gain or Involve emission of alpha, beta and
overlap of outer orbital gamma particles from the nucleus
electrons of the reactant atoms.
2. Balanced by mass only Balanced by mass and energy
3. The energy changes is very The energy changes are far exceed
much less than nuclear reaction than chemical reactions
4. The energy is expressed in terms The energy involved is expressed in
of kilojoules per mole MeV (Million electron volts) per
individual nucleus
5. No new element is produced New element / isotope may be
since nucleus is unaffected. produced during the nuclear
reaction
2. Write a note on Radio carbon dating.
RADIO CARBON DATING:

This method is based on the fact that 6C14, radioactive isotope of carbon is
formed in the upper atmosphere by reaction with neutrons (from cosmic
rays).
7N14 + 0n1 → 6C14 + 1H1
The C14 atoms thus produced are rapidly oxidized to 14CO2 which in
turn is incorporated in plants as result of photosynthesis.
6C14 → 7N14 + -1e0
5700 years a fossil (plant or animal) will lose half the amount of
carbon-14 present in its living state.
Therefore by knowing either the amount of C14 or the number of β-
particles emitted per minute per gram of carbon at the initial and final
stages, the Age of carbon material is,
2.303 x t1/2 Amount of C14 in fresh wood
t = ------------------ log ----------------------------------------
0.693 Amount of C14 in dead wood
Uses:
1) Great tool for correlating facts of historical importance.
2).Understanding the evolution of life, and rise and fall of civilizations.
3. Explain nuclear fusion reactions in star & sun.

ss***{Page 60 of 258}***ss
NUCLEAR FUSION REACTIONS IN STAR & SUN

Sun is giving out energy equally in all possible directions at the
rate of 3.7 × 1033 ergs/sec.
The various fusion reactions taking place in the sun are as follows.
4. Give the uses of radioactive isotope in medicine.
Radioactive isotopes which are useful in medicine:

S.No Isotope Uses
1. Tritium (1H )
3 Measure water content of the
body
2. Carbon – 11 Brain scan
3. Carbon – 14 Radio immunology
4. Iodine – 131 Diagnosis of damaged heart
muscles and hyper thyroidism
5. Mercury –197 Kidney scan
6. Phosphorous-32 Detection of eye tumours
7. Iron – 59 Diagnosis of anemia
8. Cobalt – 60 Treatment of cancer
9. Sodium –24 Location of blood clots and
Circularity disorders
10. Gold – 198 Curing of cancers
5. Explain nuclear fission reaction with example.

ss***{Page 61 of 258}***ss
Nuclear fission reaction:
Nuclear fission is the process in which a heavy nucleus breaks up into
two lighter nuclei of almost equal size with the release of an enormous
amount of energy. (e.g. bombarding 92U235 with slow moving neutrons).
The process is usually accompanied by emission of neutrons. Then nuclear
fission has been produced in heavy nuclei such as U235,U238, Th232 by
neutrons, protons, deuterons.
Mechanism of fission: Example:

92U235 + 0n1 → 56Ba141 + 36Kr92 + 3 0n1 + 200 MeV
56Ba140 + 36Kr93 + 30n1
92U235 + 0n1 →92U 236(unstable) 54Xe144 + 38Sr90 + 20n1
55Cs144 + 37Rb90 + 20n1
This fission process is self-multiplying process and hence a tremendous

amount of energy is released in a very short interval of time. Therefore,
explosion takes place. Atom bomb is based on nuclear fission process.
6. Write a note on nuclear fusion and hydrogen bomb.
Nuclear Fusion:
When lighter nuclei moving at a high speed are fused together to form a
heavy nucleus, the process is called nuclear fusion.
In fusion reaction,
 Mass of heavier nucleus formed < Total mass of two lighter nuclei.
 Source of energy in a fusion reaction is also the disappearance of mass,
which gets converted into energy.
 Nuclear fusion reaction takes place at very high temperature of about 108K.
 Therefore, this reaction is called thermo nuclear reaction.
1H2 + 1H3 → 2He4 + 0n1 + Energy
Deuterium Tritium Helium
 The Mass loss is equal to 0.018 amu and the corresponding energy released is
1.79×109 KJmol-1
Example:
Hydrogen Bomb:
Hydrogen bomb consists of an arrangement for nuclear fission in the
centre surrounded by a mixture of deuterium (1H2) and lithium isotope
ss***{Page 62 of 258}***ss
(3Li6). Fission reaction provides the high temperature necessary to start the
fusion.
a) Fission → heat + neutrons
b) 3Li6 + 0n1 → 1H3 + 2He4 + 4.78 MeV
c) 1H2 + 1H3 → 2He4 + 0n1 + 17.6 MeV
7. Explain the uses of radioactive isotope in studying mechanism of reactions.
Study of reaction mechanism:
a) Mechanism of photosynthesis in plants:
A small quantity of Radioactive CO*2 containing radioactive oxygen
O18ismixed with ordinary carbon dioxide and the process is carried out. It has
been found that oxygen gas evolved along with sugar formation is non-
radioactive. Therefore O2 produced comes from water and not from carbon
dioxide. So the correct mechanism is as follows.
b) Study of hydrolysis of ester:

By labelling oxygen, the mechanism of ester hydrolysis can be studied by
using water labelled with O18. The hydrolysis of an ester by water enriched with
radioactive oxygen is indicated as:
Therefore it is the acid and not alcohol produced which is radioactive

confirming the above mechanism.
******←(PHYSICAL-CHEMISTRY)→******
8. SOLID STATE-II
1. The number of chloride ions that surrounds the central Na+ ion in NaCl crystal is
a) 12 b) 8 c) 6 d) 4
2. The Bragg’s equation is
a) λ= 2d sin b) nd = 2λsin c)2λ= nd sin d) nλ= 2d sin
3. A regular three dimensional arrangement of identical points in space is called
a) Unit cell b) Space lattice c) Primitive d) Crystallography
4. The smallest repeating unit in space lattice which when repeated over and again
results in the crystal of the given substance is called
a) Space lattice b) Crystal lattice c) Unit cell d) Isomorphism
5. The crystal structure of CsCl is
a) Simple cubic b) face-centred cubic
c) Tetragonal d) Body centred cubic
6. An example for Frenkel defect is
ss***{Page 63 of 258}***ss
a) NaCl b) AgBr c) CsCl d) FeS
7. Semiconductors which exhibit conductivity due to the flow of excess negative
electrons are called
a) Super conductors b) n-type semiconductors
c) p-type semiconductors d) Insulators
8. In the Bragg’s equation for diffraction of X-rays,’n’ represents
a) The number of moles b) Avogadro number
c) A quantum number d) Order of reflection
9. The number of close neighbors in a body centred cubic lattice of identical sphere
a) 6 b) 4 c) 12 d) 8
10. The crystals which are good conductors of electricity and heat are
a) Ionic crystals b) Molecular crystals
c) Metallic crystals d) covalent crystals
11. In a simple cubic cell, each point on a corner is shared by
a) One unit cell b) Two unit cell c) 8 unit cell d) 4 unit cell
12. The ability of certain ultra-cold substances to conduct electricity without
resistance is called
a) Semiconductor b) Conductor c) Superconductor d) Insulator
13. The total number of atoms per unit cell is bcc is
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
14. Rutile is
a) TiO2 b) Cu2O c) MoS2 d) Ru
15. Semiconductors are used as
a) Rectifiers b) transistors c) solar cells d) all the above
16. An example of metal deficiency defect
a) NaCl b) AgCl c) CsCl d) FeS

1. When an ion leaves its regular sites occupies a positive in the space between the
lattice site is called__________
a) Schottky defect b) Frenkel defect c) Impurity defect d) Vacancy defect
2. Which one of the following has AB type crystal with co-ordination number 4?
a) CsCl b) TiO2 c) ZnS d) BN
3. The size of the anion in Frenkel defect crystal is _____________
a) Larger than cation b) Smaller than the cation
c) equal in size with cation d) both are larger in size.
4. Total number of atoms per unit cell in FCC
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
5. The crystal lattice co-ordination number four is ____
a) CsCl b) ZnO c) BN d) NaCl
ss***{Page 64 of 258}***ss
6. Which one of the following crystal has 8: 8 structures?
(a) MgF2 (b) CsCl (c) KCl (d) NaCl

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What are Super conductors? (D.Q, Mar-2006, July-2006, Oct-2008, Jul-2009,
Mar-2010, Jun-2010, Mar-2013,jun-15)
Super conductors
 The ability of certain ultra-cold substances to conduct electricity without
resistance is called super conductivity. This superconductivity state is a state
in which a material has virtually zero electrical resistance. Substances
having this property are called super conductors.
2. What is Glassy (or) vitreous state? (Oct-2006, Oct-2007, Mar-2012, Mar-

2014)
Glassy (or) vitreous state
 Glassy or vitreous state is a condition in which certain substance can exist,
lying between the solid and liquid states.
3. Write a note on molecular crystal. (Mar-2008, Mar-2011)

Molecular crystal
 Molecular crystals consist of molecules which do not carry any charge.
The forces binding the molecules together are of two types
(i) Dipole-dipole forces occur in solids which consists of polar molecules
e.g., ice.
(ii) The Vander Waal’s forces are more general and occur in all kinds of
molecular solids.
4. Write a note on Frenkel defect (June-2008)

Frenkel defect
 This defect arises when an ion occupies an interstitial position between the
lattice points.
 This defect occurs generally in ionic crystals in which the anion is much
larger in size than the cation. AgBr is an example for this type of defect.
 One of the Ag+ ion occupies a position in the interstitial space rather than
its own appropriate site in the lattice.
 The crystal remains neutral since the number of positive ions is the same as
the number of negative ions.
ss***{Page 65 of 258}***ss
5. Calculate the number of CsCl unit in crystal. (Mar-2007)
6. State Bragg’s Law? (June-2011)
Bragg’s Law
 A simple relation between the wavelengths of the X-rays,the
interplanar distance in the crystal and the angle of reflection, is
known asBragg’s equation.
Bragg’s equation is n= 2d sin

Where, n is the order of reflection
is the wavelength of X-rays,
d is the inter planar distance in the crystal
is the angle of reflection
7. Sketch the following lattice a) simple cubic b) Body centered cubic c) Face
centered cubic (March-2009, Jun-2012,)
8. What is super conducting transition temperature? (July-2007, oct - 2014)

ss***{Page 66 of 258}***ss
Super conducting transition temperature
 The super conducting transition temperature ‘Tc’ of a material is defined
as a critical temperature at which the resistivity of the material is
suddenly changed to zero. Thus at that temperature a material is
changed from normal material to superconductor.
9. Give the uses of super conductors? (July-2010, Jun -2014)

Uses of super conductors
 It is a basis of new generation of energy saving power systems. Super
conducting generators are smaller in size and weight when we
compare with conventional generators. These generators consume very
low energy and so we can save more energy.
 High efficiency ore separating machines may be built using
superconducting magnets.
 Superconducting solenoids are used in Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
Imaging equipment which is whole body scan equipment.
10. How glasses are formed? (Oct-2009,Oct-12,Jun-13, Mar - 2015)

Glasses:
 When certain liquids are cooled rapidly there is no formation of crystals
at a definite temperature, such as occurring on slow cooling. The viscosity
of the liquid increases steadily and finally a glassy substance is formed.
IMPORTANT:
1. Define the terms; space lattice and unit cell.
(i) Space lattice
A regular three dimensional arrangement of identical points in
space is called space lattice.
(ii) Unit cell.
Unit cell is the smallest fundamental repeating portion of a crystal
lattice from which the crystal is built by repetition in three dimensions.
2. How crystals are classified?

Four types:
(1) Molecular Crystal. (2) Covalent Crystal.
(3) Metallic Crystal. (4) Ionic Crystal.
3. Give example for molecular and ionic crystals.

Molecular Crystal – ice ; Ionic crystals - NaCl .
ss***{Page 67 of 258}***ss
4. Give two examples for AB and AB2 type ionic crystals.
AB type: CsCl, NaCl. AB2 type: TiO2, CO2.
5. What is imperfection in solids?

Imperfection in Solids
 The term imperfection or defect is generally used to describe any deviation
of the ideally perfect crystal from the periodic arrangement of its
constituents.
6. What is Co-ordination number?

Co-ordination number
 Number of closed neighbours atoms in unit cellis called Co - ordination
number.
7. Write a short note on metallic crystals.

Metallic crystals
 Metallic crystal consists of an assemblage of positive ions immersed in a
sea of mobile electrons.
 Thus, each electron belongs to a number of positive ions and each positive
ion belongs to a number of electrons.
 The force that binds a metal ion to a number of electrons within its
sphere of influence is known as metallic bond.
 This force of attraction is strong and is thus responsible for a compact solid
structure of metals.
EXTRA:
1. What is point defect?
Point defect
If the deviation occurs due tomissing atoms, displaced atoms or extra
atoms, the imperfection is named as a point defect.
2. Write a short note on Ionic crystals.

Ionic crystals
 In ionic crystals, the units occupying lattice points are positive and
negative ions.
 Each ion of a given sign is held by columbic forces of attraction to all ions
of opposite sign.
 The forces are very strong. E.g. NaCl .
3. What is metal excess defect?

Metal excess defect
ss***{Page 68 of 258}***ss
 If a crystal of NaCl is heated in sodium vapour, it acquires a yellow colour.
 This yellow colour is due to the formation of a non-stoichiometric
compound of NaCl in which there is a slight excess of sodium ions.
4. What is metal deficiency defect?

Metal deficiency defect
 In certain cases, one of the positive ions is missing from its lattice site and
the extra negative charge is balanced by some nearby metal ion
acquiring additional charges instead of original charge.
 This type of defect is generally found in compounds of transition metals
which can exhibit variable valency.
 E.g. FeO and FeS
1. Explain the Bragg’s spectrometer method.
Bragg’s spectrometer method:
It is used to studying crystals using X-rays. The apparatus consists of
a X-ray tube from which a narrow beam of X-rays is allowed to fall on the
crystal mounted on a rotating table. The rotating table is provided with
scale and vernier, from which the angle of incidence,θ can be measured.
X-ray spectrometer
 Crystal table carries an ionisation chamber.
 The rays reflected from the crystal enter into the ionization chamber and
ionize the gas present inside.
 Due to the ionisation, current is produced, which is direct measure of
intensity of reflected beam from the crystal.
 For different angles of incidence, the corresponding ionization current is
measured from the electrometer.
 These values are plotted in the form of graph.
For NaCl , the maximum reflection for 100 plane
Order of Angle of Sine

reflection reflection (θ) values
ss***{Page 69 of 258}***ss
(n) Ratio
1 5.9° 0.103 1:2:3
2 11.85° 0.205
3 18.15° 0.312
The ratio confirms the correctness of Bragg’s equation.
2. Explain Schottky&Frenkel defects.
S. Schottky defects: Frenkel defects:
NO Example:(NaCl) Ionic crystal Example:(AgBr) Ionic crystal
1. Lattice points are unoccupied. It is An ion occupies an interstitial
called lattice vacancies. position between the lattice points.
2. Crystal remains neutral Crystal remains neutral.

( missing no.of cation = missing (no. of cation = no.of anion )
no.of anion).
3. Positive and negative ions do not Anion is much larger in size than the
differ much in size. Cation.
4.
3. Mention the properties of Ionic crystals.

Properties Ionic Crystals:
1. Melting and boiling points are very high.
2. Hard and brittle.
3. Insulators in the solid state.
4. Soluble in water and also in other polar solvents.
5. Good conductors when dissolved in water.
4. What is super conductivity and give its applications.

Super conductors:
The ability of certain ultra-cold substances to conduct electricity
without resistance is called super conductivity. Substances having this
property are called super conductors.
Application of superconductors:
 It is a basis of new generation of energy saving power systems. Super
conducting generators are smaller in size and weight when we compare with
ss***{Page 70 of 258}***ss
conventional generators. These generators consume very low energy and so
we can save more energy.
 High efficiency ore separating machines may be built using super
conducting magnets.
 Superconducting solenoids are used in Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
Imaging equipment which is whole body scan equipment.
5. Explain the nature of Glass.

Nature of Glasses:
When certain liquids are cooled rapidly there is no formation of
crystals at a definite temperature, such as occurring on slow cooling. The
viscosity of the liquid increases steadily and finally a glassy substance is
formed.
Chief characteristics:
 Glass are hardness, rigidity and ability to withstand shearing stresses.
 Glasses are optically isotropic and on heating without any sharp transition
passes into a mobile liquid.
 At a high temperature glasses undergo phase transition when crystals
separate first as they do form super cooled liquid.
 Therefore, glasses are regarded as amorphous solids or super cooled
liquids as well.
 Thus, glassy or vitreous state is a condition in which certain substance can
exist, lying between the solid and liquid states.
6. What is Bragg’s equation? Explain its significances.
Bragg’s Equation:
nλ = 2d sinθ Where, n - Order of reflection

λ - Wavelength of X-rays
d - Interplanar distance in the crystal
θ - Angle of reflection
Significance of Bragg’s equation

 If we use X-rays of known (λ), then (d) in an unknown crystal can be
calculated. On the other hand, if we use a crystal whose (d) is known, then the
(λ)of X-rays can be calculated.
 It gives the essential condition for diffraction to occur.
 When the experiment is done, there will be a maximum reflection at a
particular angle θ. That angle is noted. It corresponds to first order
ss***{Page 71 of 258}***ss
reflection (n=1). SimilarlyIf the angle ‘θ’ is increased, maximum reflection
occurs at some other higher angle.
7. Explain AB & AB2 types of crystals with example.
(i) AB type crystal. (E.g)

AB AB
Lattice type : CsCl NaCl
Coordination number 8 6
Let us discuss the structure of CsCl for AB type.
It is body centered cubic system. The chloride ions are at the corners
of a cube whereas Cs+ ion is at the centre of the cube or vice versa. Each Cs+
ion is connected with eight Cl- ion and Cl- is connected with eight Cs+ ions.
(ii) AB2 Crystal: (E.g) SiO2, TiO2

For example Rutile (TiO2) has the following structure.
8. Explain the different types of crystals with suitable example.

ss***{Page 72 of 258}***ss
TYPES OF CRYSTALS:
1. Molecular Crystals
 Molecular crystals consist of molecules whichdo not carry any charge.
 (i) Dipole-dipole interaction and (ii) Vanderwaal’s forces.
 Example - ice.
2. Covalent Crystals:
 It is consists of atoms linked together by a continuous system of covalent
bonds.
 Example – Diamond.
3. Metallic Crystals:
 It consists of an assemblage of positive ions immersed in a sea of mobile
electrons.
 Each electron belongs to a number of positive ions and each positive ion
belong to a number of electrons.
 The force that binds a metal ion to a number of electrons within its sphere
of influence is known as metallic bond.
4. Ionic Crystals:
 In ionic crystals, the units occupying lattice points are positive and
negative ions.
 Each ion of a given sign is held by coulombic forces of attraction to all ions
of opposite sign. The forces are very strong.
ss***{Page 73 of 258}***ss
9. THERMODYANAMICS-II
1. The amount of heat exchanged with the surrounding at constant temperature and
pressure is called
a) ∆E b) ∆H c) ∆S d) ∆G
2. All the naturally occuring processes proceed spontaneously in a direction which
leads to
a) Decrease of entropy b) increase in enthalpy
c) Increase in free energy d) decrease of free energy
3. In an adiabatic process which of the following is true?
a) q = w b) q = 0 c) ∆E = q d) P∆V =0
4. When a liquid boils, there is
a) An increase in entropy b) a decrease in entropy
c) An increase in heat of vaporization d) an increase in free energy
5. If ∆G for a reaction is negative, the change is
a) Spontaneous b) Non-spontaneous c) Reversible d) Equilibrium
6. Which of the following does not result in an increase in the entropy?
a) Crystallization of sucrose from solution b) rusting of iron
c) Conversion of ice to water d) vaporization of camphor
7. In which of the following process, the process is always non-feasible?
a) ∆H > 0, ∆S > 0 b) ∆H < 0, ∆S > 0 c) ∆H > 0, ∆S < 0 d) ∆H < 0, ∆S < 0
8. Change in Gibb’s free energy is given by
a) ∆G = ∆H + T∆S b) ∆G = ∆H – T∆S c) ∆G = ∆H x T∆S d) none
9. For the reaction 2Cl(g) →Cl2(g), the signs of ∆H and ∆S respectively are
a) +, – b) +, + c) –, – d) –, +
1. Entropy is a_______________
a) State function b) Path function
c) intensive property d) none of the above
2. The entropy of vapourisation of an ideal liquid is equal to_________
a) 20 cal deg-1 mol-1 b) 25 cal deg-1mol-1
c) 21 cal deg-1mol-1 d) 30 cal deg-1 mol-1
3. Which one of the following is a state function___________
a) q b) c) W d)
4. The network obtained from a system is given by____________
a) b) c) – d)
5. The maximum percentage efficiency possible from an engine working between
and is
a) 25% b) 100% c) 78% d) 67%
ss***{Page 74 of 258}***ss
6. The change of entropy for the process H2O(lig) H2O(Vap) involving
at 373K is_______________.
a) 120 Jmol-1K-1 b) 9.1x10-3 J mol-1K-1
c) 109.52 mol-1K-1 d) 9.1x10-4 mol-1K-1
7. The entropy change involved in the process of H2O(s) H2O(l) at and 1 atm
pressure involving fusion=6008 J mol-1 is ____________
a) 22.007 J mol-1K-1 b) 22.007 J mol K-1
c) 220.07 J mol K-1 d) 2.2007 J mol K-1
8. Entropy(S) and the entropy change ( S) of a process________.
a) Are path functions b) are state functions c) Are constants d) no value
9. H2O(l) H2O(g) in this process the entropy__________
a) Remains constant b) decreases c) Increases d) becomes Zero
10. Thermodynamics conditions for irreversible spontaneous process at constant T
and P is___
a) b) c) d)
11. Standard free energy of formation of elements are taken as__________
a) Positive b) negative c) zero d) all of these
12. Free energy (G) and the free energy change ( ) correspond to the ___
a) System only b) surrounding only
c) system and surrounding d) all of these
13. In SI unit of 1 eu is ____________
a) 41.84EU b) 4.184EU c) 41804EU d) 4184EU.
14. A process accompanied by increases in free energy tends to be ______
a) Reversible process b) irreversible process
c) Non-spontaneous process d) spontaneous process
15. For an iso thermal process, the entropy change of the universe during reversible
process.
a) Zero b) More c) Less d) none of these
16. The entropy change for following process possessing
-1.1 mole Sn (α, 130C) 1 mole Sn (β, 130) is __
a) 22.007J.mole-1 K-1 b) 7.307J.mole-1 K-1
c) 0.314J.mole-1 K-1 d) 109.52J.mole-1 K-1
17. The SI unit of entropy is
a) Cal K-l mol-1 b) erg K-1 mol-1 c) J deg-1 mol-2 d) J K-l mol-1
18. Which is the correct statement of IInd law of thermodynamic?
a) A process accompanied by decrease in entropy tends to be spontaneous
b) Efficiency of a machine can be cent percent
ss***{Page 75 of 258}***ss
c) It is impossible to transfer heat from a cold body to hot body by a
machine without doing any work
d) It is possible to convert the input energy completely to work by a machine
19. The percentage efficiency of a heat engine working between the temperature
T1 K and T2 K (T1>T2) is given by --------
a) ( (T2 – T1) / T2)100 b) ( (T1 – T2) / T1)100 c) (T1/T2)100 d)(T2/T1)100
20. The change in entropy for a system and surrounding are - 0.228 JK-1 and
+0.260 JK-1 respctively. Then entropy change of the universe is
a) - 0.0313 JK-1 b) +0.0313 JK-1 c) + 0.877 JK-1 d) - 0.877 JK-1

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What types of liquids or substances deviate from Trouton’s rule? (Oct-
2006,June-2011)
 Low boiling liquids such as hydrogen and Helium which boil only a little
above 0K.
 Polar substances like water, alcohol which form hydrogen bonded liquids
and exhibit very high boiling points as well as high ΔHvap.
 Liquids such as acetic acid whose molecules are partially associated in
the vapor phase and possess very low entropy vaporization which is very
much less than 21 cals/ mol/deg.
2. What is Gibb’s free energy? (July-2006)
Gibb’s free energy
“A free energy function” has been introduced by II law of
thermodynamics. The free energy function, called the Gibbs free energy
function, denoted by the symbol ‘G’.
G = H – TS
H = enthalpy or heat content of the system,
T = Temperature in Kelvin
S = entropy.
3. State Clasius statement of second law of thermodynamics (July-07, oct -14)
Clasius statement
“It is impossible to transfer heat from a cold body to a hot body by a
machine without doing some work”.
4. Mention the entropy statement of second law of thermodynamics and

mention the unit of entropy also. (Oct-2008)
Entropy statement
‘A process accompanied by increase in entropy tends to be
spontaneous”.
Unit:
cgs units of entropy is cal.K-1 denoted as eu.
ss***{Page 76 of 258}***ss
The SI unit is JK-1and denoted EU. 1 eu = 4.184 EU.
5. State the Kelvin-Plank’s statement of second law of thermodynamics? (Mar-

2007,Oct-2012,Jun-2013)
Kelvin-Plank’s statement:
“It is impossible to construct an engine which operated in a complete
cycle will absorb heat from a single body and convert it completely to
work without leaving some changes in the working system”.
6. What is Entropy? Give its units? (Mar-2006, Mar - 2015)

Entropy
Entropy is a measure of randomness or disorder of the molecule of a
system. Entropy function ‘S’ represents the ratio of the heat involved (q) to the
temperature (T) of the process. S = q / T
Unit:
cgs units of entropy is cal.K-1 denoted as eu. The SI unit is JK-1 and denoted EU.
1 eu = 4.184 EU.
7. State Trouton’s rule. (June-2009)

Trouton’s rule
The heat of vaporisation (ΔHvap)in calories per mole divided by the boiling
point of the liquid in Kelvin is a constant equal to 21 cal deg-1 mole-1 and is known as
the entropy of vapourisaiton.
ALL PROBLEMS IN THERMODYNAMICS
IMPORTANT:
1. Mention the essential condition for spontaneity in a chemical reaction.
∆S >0 , ∆H < 0 , ∆G < 0
2. Predict the feasibility of a reaction when

i) Both ∆H and ∆S increase – Ans: Feasible.
ii) Both ∆H and ∆S decrease – Ans: Non-feasible.
iii) ∆H decreases but ∆S increases – Ans: Feasible.
EXTRA:
1. When does the entropy increases?

ss***{Page 77 of 258}***ss
 In a chemical reaction, when number of molecules of products are more than
the numbers of molecules of reactant entropy increases.
 In physical process, when a solid changes to liquid, when a liquid changes to
vapour and when a solid changes to vapour, entropy increase in all these
processes.
2. Define-Standard entropy.
Standard entropy
The absolute entropy of a pure substance at 25°C (298 K) and 1 atm pressure
is called the standard entropy(S°).
3. Define-Standard free energy.

Standard free energy
The standard free energy value (G°) of all substances either elements or
compounds may be calculated from H° and S° values at standard conditions of
temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atm) and the substance being present in the
standard state.
G° = H° – TS°
1. Calculate the maximum efficiency % possible from a thermal engine operating

between 110°C and 25°C. (Mar-2011)
2. What is the entropy change of an engine that operates at 100°C when 453.6
k.cal of heat is supplied to it? (Oct-2007,09,12)
3. The normal boiling point CCl4, CHCl3 and H2S are 76.70 C, 61.50 C and –59.60 C
respectively. Calculate the molar heat of vaporization of each liquid, assuming
ideal behavior. (Mar-2008,12)
4. Calculate the entropy change involved in the conversion of 1 mole of ice at 00C
and 1 atm to liquid at 00C and 1 atm. The enthalpy of fusion per mole of ice is
6008 J mol-1. (Mar-2009)
5. Calculate the change of entropy for the process, water (liq) to water (vapor,
373K) involving ΔHvap = 40850 J mol-1 at 373K. (Mar-2010,jun-15)
6. Evaluate the entropy change for the following process possessing ΔH
transition = 2090 J.mol-1. (Mar-2013)
7. For a chemical reaction the values of ΔH and ΔS at 300 K are –10 k Cal mol-1
and 20 cal. Deg-1 mol-1respectively. What is the value of ΔG of the reaction?
Calculate the ΔG of reaction at 400 K assuming ΔH and ΔS values are constant.
Predict the nature of the reaction. (Jun-2008,10)
ss***{Page 78 of 258}***ss
III. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 56 }
1. Give the various statements of II-law of thermodynamics.
SECOND LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS:
i) Kelvin- Planck statement

“It is impossible to construct an engine which operated in a complete
cycle will absorb heat from a single body and convert it completely to
work without leaving some changes in the working system”.
ii) Clausius statement:
“It is impossible to transfer heat from a cold body to a hot body by a
machine without doing some work”.
iii) Entropy statement:
‘A process accompanied by increase in entropy tends to be spontaneous”.
iv) “Efficiency of a machine can never be cent percent”.

v) It is impossibleto have a machine which converts the input energy
completely into output energy.
Output
% Efficiency = ---------------- x 100,
Input
(T1 – T2 )
% Efficiency = ----------------- x 100,
T1
By II law, T2<T1 % efficiency less than 100.
2. Give any five characteristics of Entropy.
Characteristics of entropy ‘S’:

1) Entropy (S) is a state function, which is evolved from the formulation of
II law of thermodynamics.
2) Entropy is a measure of ‘disorder ’ of the molecules of the system.
Entropy increase in all spontaneous process.
3) The energy of the universe remains constant although the entropy of the
universe tends to be maximum.
4) ΔS > 0 – Spontaneous; ΔS = 0 - equilibrium;
ΔS < 0 – Non-spontaneous.
5) Units of entropy: cgs units - cal.K-1 and SI unit - JK-1.
ss***{Page 79 of 258}***ss
3. Give the characteristics of Gibb’s free energy.

Characteristics of Free energy ‘G’
1) G = (H-TS). H = Enthalpy, S =Entropy and T = temperature.
(H, S & G are state functions)
2) G-Extensive property. ΔG-intensive property, when ΔG = (G2-G1)
3) G has a single value for the thermodynamic state of the system.
4) ΔG<0 (negative) - spontaneous and feasible,
ΔG = 0 – equilibrium.
ΔG > 0 (positive) - nonspontaneous and not feasible.
5) ΔG = ΔH – TΔS. But according to I law of thermodynamics,
ΔH = ΔE + PΔV and ΔE = q – w. ΔG = q – w + PΔV – TΔS
But ΔS =q / T And TΔS = q = heat involved in the process.
ΔG = q – w + PΔV – q = –w + PΔV (or) –ΔG = w – PΔV =network.
Network = –ΔG = w – PΔV.
4. What are spontaneous reactions? What are the essential conditions for
spontaneity of a process?
 Spontaneous reactions:
All the natural processes are spontaneous. It occur its own and does
not need to be induced.
 Essential conditions for spontaneity of a process:
(i) ΔG = G2 - G1 = -ve (or) ΔG < 0
(ii) ΔH = H2 – H1 = -ve (or) ΔH < 0
(iii) ΔS = S2 – S1 = +ve (or) ΔS > 0
(1 & 2 are initial and final state of the process)
5. State Trouton’s rule. Discuss its limitation. (or) State Trouton’s rule. What
are the substances deviate from this rule?
Trouton’s rule:
The heat of vaporisation (ΔHvap) in calories per mole divided by the
boiling point of the liquid in Kelvin is a constant equal to 21 cal deg-1 mole-1
and is known as the entropy of vapourisaiton.
Substances deviate from this rule:

ss***{Page 80 of 258}***ss
 Low boiling liquids such as H and He which boil only a little above 0K.
 Polar substances like water, alcohol which form hydrogen bonded liquids
and exhibit very high boiling points as well as high ΔHvap.
 Liquids such as acetic acid whose molecules are partially associated in the
vapour phase and possess very low entropy vaporization which is very
much less than 21 cals/ mol/deg.
10. CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM-II

1. State of chemical equilibrium is:
a) Dynamic b) stationery c) none d) both
2. If the equilibrium constants of the following reactions are 2A B is K1and B 2A
is K2, then
a) K1 = 2K2 b) K1 = 1/K2 c) K2 = (K1)2 d) K1 = 1/(K2)2
3. In the reversible reaction 2HI H2 + I2, Kp is
a) Greater than Kc b) less than Kc c) Equal to Kc d) Zero
4. In the equilibrium N2 + 3H2 2NH3, the maximum yield of ammonia will be
obtained with the process having
a) Low pressure and high temperature
b) Low pressure and low temperature
c) High temperature and high pressure
d) High pressure and low temperature
5. For the homogeneous gas reaction at 600 K 4NH3 (g)+ 5O2(g) 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g) the
equilibrium constant Kc has the unit
a) (mol dm-3)-1 b) (mol dm-3) c) (mol dm-3)10 d) (mol dm-3)-9
6. Two moles of ammonia gas are introduced into a previously evacuated 1.0 dm3
vessel in which it partially dissociates at high temperature. At equilibrium 1.0
mole of ammonia remains.The equilibrium constant Kc for the dissociation is
a) 27/16 (mole dm-3)2 b) 27/8 (mole dm-3)2
c) 27/4 (mole dm-3)2 d) None of these
7. An equilibrium reaction is endothermic if K1 and K2 are the equilibrium constants
at T1 and T2 temperatures respectively and if T2 is greater than T1then
a) K1< K2 b) K1> K2 c) K1 = K2 d) None
1. In an equilibrium reaction if is positive then___________________
a) Kc = Kp b) Kc<Kp c) Kc>Kp d) Kc=0
2. The fraction of total number of moles of reactants dissociated is called__.
a) Dissociation equilibrium b) degree of association
c)degree of dissociation d) dissociation constant
3. The maximum yield of ammonia in Haber’s process is nearly_________
ss***{Page 81 of 258}***ss
a) 47% b) 73% c) 27% d) 37%
4. The rate constant of the forward reaction and reveres reactions are 8x10-5 and
2x10-4 respectively. Then Kc is ______.
a) 0.004 b) 0.02 c) 0.2 d) 0.4
5. For the equilibrium 2H2O(g)+2Cl2(g) 4HCl(g) + O2(g), Kp and Kc are related as_.
Kp=Kc b) Kp>Kc c) Kp<Kc d) Kp and Kc cannot be related
6. An equilibrium reaction is exothermic. If K1 and K2 are the equilibrium constants

at T1 and T2 temperatures respectively and if T2 is greater than T1 then,___________
a) K1< K2 b) K1> K2 c) K1=K2 d) K1=K2=1.
7. In equilibrium constant for the formation of a product is 25, the equilibrium
constant for the decomposition of the same product is____
a) 25 b) 1/25 c) 5 d) 625
8. Which of the following gaseous equilibrium is favored by increase in temperature
a)
b)
d) Both (b) and (c).
9. In a reaction the value of Kc is_____________
a) b) c) d)
10. In the synthesis of NH3 between N2 and H2 reaction the unit of Kp is___
a) lit2mol-2 b) atm-2 c) lit atm-1 d) atm-1
11. Which one of the following has negative value for ?
a) b)
c) d)
The equilibrium constant Kc for this reaction is 16. Kp
value is.
a) b) 4 c) 64 d) 16
13. The optimum range of temperature used in contact process for the manufacture
of SO3 is__
a) b) 18
c) d) 35
14. In the Haber process the yield of ammonia is greater_____
a) At high pressure b) at low pressure
c) at high temperature d) in absence of catalyst
ss***{Page 82 of 258}***ss
15. The Equilibrium constant for the reaction 2A B is 25 mol-1 dm3 at 900K. What
is the equilibrium constant for the reaction B 2A in dm-3mol at the same
temperature?
a) 25 b) 625 c) 0.04 d) 0.4
16. The equilibrium constant Kc for A(g) B(g) is 2.5 x 10-2. The rate constant of
forward reaction is 0.05sec-1. Therefore, the rate constant of the reverse reaction
is_____.
a) 2S-1 b) 0.2S-1 c) 2 min-1 d) 0.2 min-1
17. Forward reaction takes place, when __________

a) Q >Kc b) Q <Kc c) Q = Kc d) Kc=
18. In an equilibrium reaction, when Q<Kc?

a) Forward reaction is favoured b)Reverse reaction is favoured
c) Both forward and reverse reaction is favoured d) None of these
19. In the formation of HI from H2 and I2 , Kp = Kc because
a) ∆ng = 2 b) ∆ng = 1 c) ∆ng = 0 d) ∆ng = -1
20. In which of the following gaseous reaction Kp< KC?
a) b)
c) d)
21. Presence of moisture in contact process
a) activates the catalyst b) deactivates the catalyst
c) increase the product d) make the catalyst porous
22. The maximum yield of SO3 in contact’s process is _________
a) 97% b) 37% c) 50% d) 47%
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: [Q.No. 40 }
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Define reaction Quotient (Q). (Sep-07, Jun-08, July-10,Mar-11,14,jun-15)
Reaction Quotient (Q)
‘Q’ is defined as the ratio of product of initial concentrations of products to
the product of initial concentrations of reactants under non equilibrium
conditions.
2. Dissociation of PCl5 decreases in the presence of increase in Cl2 why? (Mar-

2009,June-2011)
ss***{Page 83 of 258}***ss
According to Le-chatelier’s principle, Increase Cl2 in dissociation of PCl5 is
favour for backward reaction (formation of PCl5). Hence, dissociation of PCl5
is decreases.
PCl5(g) + →PCl3(g) + Cl2(g)
3. Sate Le-chatelier’s principle (D.Q, Mar-2007, Mar-10, Sep-11, Mar-12,15)
Le-chatelier’s principle
If a system at equilibrium is subjected to a disturbance or stress, then the
equilibrium shifts in the direction that tends to nullify the effect of the
disturbance or stress.
4. What happens when ∆ng=0, ∆ng=+ve, ∆ng=-ve in a gaseous reaction(July07)

(i) ∆ng=0 ,then Kp=Kc (ii) ∆ng=+ve , then Kp>Kc
(iii) ∆ng=-ve , then Kp<Kc
5. Define-Equilibrium constant. (Oct-2009)

Equilibrium constant
 Equilibrium constant is defined as the ratio of product of molar
concentrations of products to the product of molar concentrations of
reactants under equilibrium conditions.
6. What is the relationship between equilibrium constant and dissociations
constant? Give one example (Mar-2008)
The equilibrium constant of the dissociation equilibrium is the reciprocal
of the equilibrium constant of the formation equilibrium reaction.
2(g) + O2 (g) 2SO3 (g)
3]2
Kc= ------------------- dm3 mole-1
[SO2]2 2]
2SO3 (g) + O2 (g)

2(g)
[SO2]2 2]
Kc’ = ----------------- mole dm-3
3]2
1
Kc = ------
Kc’
7. Write the equilibrium constant for the following. (Sep-2006, Jun - 2014)
i) H2O2(g) H2O(g) + ½O2(g)
ii) CO(g) + H2O(g) CO2(g) + H2(g)
iii) N2O4(g) 2 NO2(g)
ss***{Page 84 of 258}***ss
[H2O] 2]1/2
(i) Kc = -----------------
2O2]
[CO2] 2]
(ii) Kc = --------------
[CO] 2O]
[NO2]2
(iii) Kc = ----------
[N2O4]
8. Why chemical equilibrium is referred to as dynamic equilibrium? (Sep-10)

Chemical equilibrium is dynamic when the forward and reverse reactions
take place endlessly and simultaneously with equal rates. Therefore
chemical equilibrium is called as dynamic equilibrium.
9. Discuss the effect of temperature on N2O4 (g) 2 NO2 (g). (Jun-2012)
Effect of Temperature:
 Increase the temperature - Favour for Forward reaction (Endothermic)
(Formation of NO2).
 Decrease the temperature–Favour for Backward reaction (Exothermic)
(Formation ofN2O4).
IMPORTANT:
1. Calculate ∆ng, for the following reactions
i) H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI (g)
ii) 2H2O (g) + 2Cl2(g) 4HCl (g) + O(g)
Calculation of ∆ng:
ss***{Page 85 of 258}***ss
EXTRA:
1. State Law of mass action.
Law of mass action
According to Law of Mass action, the rate of the chemical reaction is directly
proportional to active mass of the reactant.
2. Define-Degree of dissociation.
Degree of dissociation
Degree of dissociation (x) which represents the fraction of total moles of
reactant dissociated
3. Discuss the effect of Pressure on N2O4 (g) 2 NO2 (g).
Effect of pressure:
Increase the pressure–Favour for Backward reaction (Formation of N2O4).
Decrease the pressure–Favour for Forward reaction (Formation of NO2).
4. Calculate the Kc, when a mixture containing 8.07 moles of H2 and 9.08 moles
ofI2 are reacted at 4480C until 13.38 moles of HI was formed at the
equilibrium.
ss***{Page 86 of 258}***ss
5. Initially, 0.1 moles each of H2 and I2 gases and 0.02 moles of HI gas are mixed in a
reaction vessel of constant volume at 300K. Predict the direction towards which
the reaction proceeds [Kc= 3.5 × 10-2].
It is a reverse reaction.
6. Degree of dissociation of PCl5 at 1 atm and 25°C is 0.2. Calculate the pressure at
which PCl5 is half dissociated at 25°C.
ss***{Page 87 of 258}***ss
1. In 1 litre volume reaction vessel, the equilibrium constant Kc of the reaction

PCl5 PCl3 + Cl2 is 2 × 10-4 lit-1. What will be the degree of dissociation
assuming only a small extent of 1 mole of PCl5 has dissociated? (Oct-2012)
2. Dissociation equilibrium constant of HI is 2.06 x10-2at 4580 C. At equilibrium,
concentrations of HI and I2 are 0.36M and 0.15M respectively. What is the
equilibrium concentration of H2 at 4580 C.(Jun-2009)
3. For the reaction A + B 3C at 250 C, a 3 litre volume reaction vessel contains
1,2 and 4 moles of A, B and C respectively at equilibrium, calculate the
equilibrium constant Kc of the reaction at 250 C.(Jun-2013 )
4. The equilibrium constant Kc for A(g) B(g) is 2.5 × 10-2. The rate constant of
the forward reaction is 0.05 sec-1. Calculate the rate constant of the reverse
reaction.
5. In the equilibrium H2 + I2 2HI the number of moles of H2, I2 and HI are 1,2,3
moles respectively. Total pressure of the reaction mixture is 60 atm. Calculate
the partial pressures of H2, I2 and HI in the mixture.
6. In 1 litre volume reaction vessel, the equilibrium constant Kc of the reaction
PCl5 PCl3 + Cl2 is 2 × 10-4 lit-1. What will be the degree of dissociation
assuming only a small extent of 1 mole of PCl5 has dissociated?
7. For the equilibrium 2NOCl(g) 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) the value of the equilibrium
constant Kc is 3.75 × 10-6 at 790°C. Calculate Kp for this equilibrium at the
same temperature. Hint: Kp = Kc(RT)Δng
ss***{Page 88 of 258}***ss
8. For the equilibrium 2SO3(g) SO2(g) + O2(g) the value of equilibrium constant is
4.8 x 10-3 at 7000C. At equilibrium, if the concentrations of SO3 and SO2 are
0.60M and 0.15M respectively. Calculate the concentration of O2 in the
equilibrium mixture.
9. Hydrogen iodide is injected into a container at 458°C. Certain amount of HI
dissociates to H2 and I2. At equilibrium, concentration of HI is found to be
0.421M while [H2] and [I2] each equal to 6.04 × 10-2M, at 458°C. Calculate the
value of the equilibrium constant of the dissociation of HI at the same
temperature.
10.The equilibrium constant for the reaction 2SO3 (g) 2SO2 (g) + O2 (g) is 0.15 at
900 K. Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reaction
2SO2 (g) + O2 (g) 2SO3 (g) at the same temperature.
1. Derive the values of KP & KC for the formation of HI.
For equilibrium of HI H2(g) + I2(g) HI(g)
Where, (∆ng = 0 and Kp = Kc )
, where
[H2] = (a-x) / V, [I2] = (b-x) / V and [HI] = 2x / V
x is extend of reaction.
ss***{Page 89 of 258}***ss
2. Derive the relation Kp= KC (RT) ∆ng.
Relationship between Kp and Kc :
ss***{Page 90 of 258}***ss
3. Derive the expression of KC& KP for decomposition of PCl5.
[PCl5] = (a-x) / v [PCl3] = x /v [Cl2] = x /v
ss***{Page 91 of 258}***ss
4. Explain the favorable conditions for getting maximum yield of NH3 in

Haber’s process.
Haber’s process: N2 (g) + 3H2 (g) 2NH3 (g) ; ΔH0f = –22.0 kcal/mole
Favorable conditions for Haber’s process :
Pressure Temperature Catalyst Ratio Reaction type Yield

(atm)
300 – 500 5000C-5500C Iron (Fe) 1:3 Exothermic 37%
(N2: H2)
 Steam is passed to remove away the ammonia.
 High pressure and low temperature – Favour for forward reaction
(Exothermic) & more yields.
5. Explain the favorable conditions for getting maximum yield of SO3 in

Contact process.
Contact process: 2SO2 (g) + O2 (g) 2SO3 (g) ; ΔH0f = –47.0 kcal/mole
Favorable conditions for Contact process:
Pressure Temperature Catalyst Ratio Reaction type Yield

(atm)
700 – 1200 4000C–4500 C V2O5 2:1 Exothermic 97%
(porous) (SO2 : O2)
 If presence of moisture catalyst deactivated.
 SO3 is the anhydride of H2SO4.
 It is used in the manufacture of H2SO4 & oleum.
 High pressure and low temperature –Favour for forward reaction
(Exothermic) & more yield.
6. The equilibrium constant of the dissociation equilibrium is the reciprocal of

the equilibrium constant of the formation equilibrium. Illustrate with a
suitable example.
Formation of equilibrium Dissociation of Equilibrium
ss***{Page 92 of 258}***ss
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g) 2SO3(g) 2SO2(g) + O2(g)
Kc = 1 / Kc’
Since, Equilibrium constant is the reciprocal of Dissociation constant.
7. State Le –Chatlier‟s principle. Discuss the effect of pressure, concentration
and temperature on N2(g) +O2(g) 2NO(g).
Le Chatelier’s Principle:
“If a system at equilibrium is subjected to a disturbance or stress, then the
equilibrium shifts in the direction that tends to nullify the effect of the
disturbance or stress”.
Effect of Pressure, Temperature and Concentration on
N2(g) +O2(g) 2NO(g).
 Pressure has no effect on this equilibrium, because ∆ng = 0.
8. Discuss the effect of temperature and pressure on the following

equilibrium. N2O4(g) 2NO2(g) ΔH = +59.0 kj/mole.
ss***{Page 93 of 258}***ss
11. CHEMICAL KINETICS-II

1. Hydrolysis of an ester by dilute HCl is an example for
a) Second order reaction b) zero order reaction
c) Pseudo first order reaction d) first order reaction
2. The unit of zero order rates constant is
a) Litre mol-1 sec-1 b) mol litre-1 sec-1 c) sec-1 d) litre2 sec-1
3. The excess energy which a molecule must possess to become active is known as
a) Kinetic energy b) threshold energy
c) Potential energy d) activation energy
4. Arrhenius equation is
a) k= Ae-1/RT b) k = Ae-RT/Ea c) k = Ae-Ea/RT d) k = AeEa/RT
5. The term A in Arrhenius equation is called as
a) Probability factor b) Activation of energy
c) Collision factor d) Frequency factor
6. The sum of the powers of the concentration terms that occur in the rate equation
is called
a) Molecularity b) order c) rate d) rate constant
7. Reactions in which the reacting molecules react in more than one way yielding
different set of products are called
a) Consecutive reactions b) parallel reactions
c) Opposing reactions d) chain reactions
8. The half-life period of a first order reaction is 10 minutes. Then its rate constant is
a) 6.93 x102 min-1 b) 0.693 x10-2 min-1
c) 6.932 x10-2 min-1 d) 69.3 x10-1 min-1
9. For a reaction: aA bB, the rate of reaction is doubled when the concentration of
A is increased by four times. The rate of reaction is equal to
a) K[A]a b) K[A]1/2 c) K[A]1/a d) K[A]
10. 2N2O5→ 4NO2 + O2,d[N2O5]/dt =K1[N2O5] ; d[NO2]/dt =K2[N2O5]; And d[O2]/dt
=K3[N2O5] ;the relation between K1, K2 and K3 is,
a) 2K1 = 4k2 = k3 b) K1 = K2 = K3 c) 2K1 = K2 = 4K3 d) 2K1 = K2 = K3
11. For a reaction, Ea=0 and K=4.2 x10 sec at 300K, the value of Kat 310K will be
5 -1
ss***{Page 94 of 258}***ss
a) 4.2 x105 sec-1 b) 8.4 x105 sec-1
c) 8.4 x10-5 sec-1 d) unpredictable
1. The first order rate constant of a reaction 0.0693 min-1. Then the time required
for 50% completion of a reaction is___________
a) 10 min b) 1 min c) 100 min d) 50min
2. 50% of a first order reaction is completed in 20 minutes.The time required for
75% completion
a) 60 min b) 10 min c) 40 min d) 80 min
3. Hydrolysis of an ester by dilute HCl is an example for______________

a) Zero order reaction b) first order reaction
c) Pseudo-first order reaction d) second order reaction
4. Half-life period of a first order reaction is 20 min. the time taken foe the
completion of 99.9% of the reaction is_______
a) 200 min b) 2000 min c) 250 sec d) 120 min
5. Ina first order reaction the concentration of the reactant is increased by 2 times.
The rate of the reaction is increased by___________
a) 2 times b) 4 times c) 10 times d) 6 times
6. Decomposition of nitrogen pent oxide in CCl4 is an example for____
a) Second order reaction b) third order reaction
c) Zero order reaction d) first order reaction.
7. The t1/2of a first order reaction is 100 min. the rate constant of the reaction is_
a) 6.93x103min-1 b) 0.693x10-3min-1
c) 6.93x10-3min-1 d) 69.3x10-2min-1
8. If the activation energy is high, then the rate of the reaction is________
a) High b) moderate c) low d) cannot be predicted.
9. The rate constant for a first order reaction is 1.54 x 10-3 s-1. Its Half-life period is
a) 540 seconds b) 450 seconds c) 45 seconds d) 54 seconds
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What is opposing reaction? Give examples.(Mar-06,Jul,Jun-09, Mar-13,
Jun 14)
Opposing reaction
In opposing reactions the products formed react back simultaneously to form
the reactants. These reactions are also called as reversible reactions. Examples
ss***{Page 95 of 258}***ss
2. Write the Arrhenius equation and explain the terms (Mar-2007, Mar-
2009,June-2011,Mar-2011,jun15)
Arrhenius equation
k = rate constant, Ea = activation energy, A = frequency factor,

R = gas constant, T = temperature in Kelvin.
3. Define order. (July-07, June-08, Mar-09,Sep-10,Sep-11,oct-14,jun-15)

Order of reaction
The sum of the powers of the exponential powers to which each concentration
term is raised in the experimentally determined rate law of a chemical reaction.
4. What is Pseudo first order reaction? Give example (Mar-2008,June-

2009,Oct-2009, June-2010,Mar-2011)
Pseudo first order reaction
In a second order reaction, when one of the reactants concentration is in
excess (10 to 100 times) of the other reactant, then the reaction follows a first
order kinetics and such a reaction is called pseudo-first order reaction.
Example: (Hydrolysis of ester)
5. What is Consecutive reaction? Give example (July-2006, Oct-2006, Sep-

2006, Sep-2009, Mar-2012, and Oct-2012,Mar-2014)
(i) Consecutive reactions:
ss***{Page 96 of 258}***ss
The reactions in which the reactant forms an intermediate and the
intermediate forms the product in one or many subsequent reactions are
called as consecutive or sequential reactions.
Example of consecutive reactions:
Saponification of a diester in presence of an alkali :
k1 k2
R'OOC– (CH2)n–COOR → R'OOC–(CH2)n–COOH → HOOC – (CH2)n – COOH
6. What is parallel reaction? Give example (Mar-2007,Mar-2010,June-

2011,Sep 2011, Jun-2012)
(ii) Parallel reactions:

In these group of reactions, one or more reactants react simultaneously in
two or more pathways to give two or more products. The parallel reactions are
also called as side reactions.
Example: Bromination of Bromobenzene
7. What is activation energy? (Sep-07,Mar-08, Oct-08,Mar-10, Mar-14, Jun -14)

Activation energy
The additional energy required by the molecules to attain the threshold
energy in addition to the energy of colliding molecules is called as activation
energy ‘Ea’.
Activation energy = threshold energy - Energy of colliding molecules
8. What are simple and complex reactions (Sep-2007,Mar - 2015)

Simple reaction
A simple reaction takes place in a single step. Simple reactions are also
known as elementary reactions. involving product formation.
Complex reactions
Reactions which do not take place in a single step but take place in a
sequence of a number of elementary steps are called as complex reactions.
9. Give three examples of first order reaction. (Oct-2012)
ss***{Page 97 of 258}***ss
10. What are complex reactions? Give example (Oct-2008)

Reactions which do not take place in a single step but take place in a
sequence of a number of elementary steps are called as complex reactions.
Example: Bromination of Bromobenzene, Saponification of Diester in
presence of alkali.
11. What is half-life period? (Jun-2013,oct - 2014)
Half-life period
Half-life period, ‘t½’, of a reaction is defined as the time required reducing
the concentration of a reactant to one half of its initial value.
12. Derive an equation for the half-life period of a first order reaction.(Jun-
2008)(Mar-2012, Jun-2012)For first order reaction
HALF-LIFE PERIOD-PROBLEMS
IMPORTANT:
1. What is meant by zero order reaction? What is the rate constant of such a
reaction?
Zero order reaction
A reactant whose concentration does not affect the reaction rate is called
as zero order reaction.
ss***{Page 98 of 258}***ss
2. Distinguish between simple and complex reaction.

S.No. Simple reaction Complex reaction
1. Occurs in single step Occurs in multi (or) many steps.
2. No side reactions Many side reactions are present.
3. Products are formed directly In some complex reactionsproducts

from the reactants are not formed in steps
directly involving the reactants
EXTRA:
1. What is first order reaction?
First order reaction
The reactions in which, the overall rate of the reaction is proportional to
the first power of concentration of one of the reactants only are called as first
order reactions
2. What is meant by threshold energy?
Threshold energy
All colliding molecules must possess certain minimum energy called as the
threshold energy which is needed to make the collisions effective and
successful.
3. Give three characteristics of order of a reaction.

Characteristics of order of a reaction
(i) The magnitude of order of a reaction may be zero, or fractional or
integral values. For an elementary reaction, its order is never fractional since it
is a one step process.
(ii) Order of a reaction should be determined only by experiments. It
cannot be predicted interms of stoichiometry of reactants and products.
. (iii)Some reactions show fractional order depending on rate.
4. Write the first order rate constant equation
k1 = first order rate constant, t=time.
5. Give three characteristics of first order reaction.

ss***{Page 99 of 258}***ss
Characteristics of first order reaction

(i) When the concentration of the reactant is increased by ‘n’ times, the rate of
reaction is also increased by n times. That is, if the concentration of the
reactant is doubled, the rate is doubled.
(ii) The unit of rate constant of a first order reaction is sec–1 or time–1.
(iii)The time required to complete a definite fraction of reaction is

independent of the initial concentration, of the reactant if t1/u is the time
of one ‘u’th fraction of reaction to take place then from equation
.
6. Compound A reacts by first order kinetics. At 25°C, the rate constant of the
reaction is 0.45 sec–1. What is the half-life of A at 25°C.What is the time
required to have 12.5% unreacted A for first order reaction.
7. Show that for a first order reaction time required for 99%completion is
twice the time required for 90% completion of the reaction.
ss***{Page 100 of 258}***ss

8. The rate constant for a first order reaction is 1.54 x 10-3sec-1.Calculate its
half-life period.(Mar -2015)
1. Rate constant of a first order reaction is 0.45 sec–1, calculate its half-life.
2. Show that for a first order reaction the time required for 99.9%
completion is about 10 times its half-life period.
3. The half-life period of a first order reaction is 10 mins, what percentage
of the reactant will remain after one hour?
ss***{Page 101 of 258}***ss

ss***{Page 102 of 258}***ss

ss***{Page 103 of 258}***ss

ss***{Page 104 of 258}***ss

ss***{Page 105 of 258}***ss

ss***{Page 106 of 258}***ss

12. SURFACE CHEMISTRY

1.The migration of colloidal particle under the influence of an electricfield is known
a) Electroosmosis b) cataphoresis
c) Electrodialysis d) electrophoresis
2. Which one is the correct factor that explains the increase of rate of reaction by a
catalyst?
a) Shape selectivity b) particle size
c) Increase of free energy d) lowering of activation energy
3. Fog is a colloidal solution of
a) Gas in liquid b) liquid in gas c) Gas in solid d) solid in gas.
4. The phenomenon of Tyndall’s effect is not observed in
a) Emulsion b) colloidal solution c) true solution d) None
5. The Tyndall’s effect associated with colloidal particles is due to
a) Presence of charge b) scattering of light
c) Absorption of light d) reflection of light
6. In case of physical adsorption, there is desorption when
a) Temperature increases b) temperature decreases
c) Pressure increases d) concentration increases
7. Colloidal medicines are more effective because
a) They are clean b) They are easy to prepare
c) The germs more towards, them
d) They are easily assimilated and adsorbed
8. Oil soluble dye is mixed with emulsion and emulsion remains colourlessthen, the
emulsion is
a) O/W b) W/O c) O/O d) W/W
9. For selective hydrogenation of alkynes into alkene the catalyst used is
a) Ni at 250°C b) Pt at 25°C
c) Pd, partially inactivated by quinolone d) Raney nickel
10. For chemisorption, which is wrong?
a) Irreversible b) It requires activation energy
c) It forms multimolecular layers on adsorbate
d) Surface compounds are formed
11. An emulsion is a colloidal solution of
a) Two solids b) two liquids
c) Two gases d) one solid and one liquid
12. Colloids are purified by
a) Precipitation b) coagulation c) dialysis d) filtration
ss***{Page 107 of 258}***ss
1. The catalyst used for the decomposition of KClO3 is___________
a) MnO2 b) Cl2 c) V2O5 d) Pt
2. The auto catalyst used in the oxidation of oxalic acid by acidified KMnO4 is __
a) K2SO4 b) KMnO4 c) MnSO4 d) CO2
3. The iron catalyst used in the Haber process is poisoned by_________
a) Pt b) H2 c) H2S d) As2O3
4. The emulsion used for stomach disorder is___________
a) Argyrols b) milk of magnesia
c) colloidal gold d) colloidal antimony
5. The emulsifying agent used in O/W emulsion is_____________
a) Protein b) long chain alcohol
c) lamp black d) heavy metal salts of fatty acids.
6. In the oxidation of oxalic acid by acidified KmnO4 the auto catalyst is
5 + 2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 2MnSO4 + K2SO4+10CO2 + 8H2O.
a) MnSO4 b) K2SO4 c) H2O d) CO2
7. Artificial rain can be caused using ____________
a) Alum b) electrified sand c) As2O3sol d) Fe(OH)3
8. For the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide the positive catalyst is___
a) Glycerol b) MnO2 c) Pt d) alcohol
9. The negative catalyst and positive catalyst for the decomposition of hydrogen
Peroxide are respectively
a) Pt and As2O3 b) As2O3 and MnO2
c) C3H5 (OH)3 and Pt d) alcohol and MnO2
10. Curd is a colloidal solution of ________
a) Liquid in liquid b) liquid in solid
c) solid in solid d) solid in liquid
11. Which one of the following factors is false regarding catalyst?
a) Small quantity energy b) Initiate the reaction
c) remains unchanged in mass and chemical composition
d) specific in its action
12. Smoke is a colloidal solution of ________________
a) Gas in solid b) solid in gas c) gas in liquid d) liquid in gas
13. Which type of colloid is a sol?
a) Solid in liquid b) liquid in solid c) solid in solid d) gas in solid
14.The platinum catalyst used in the oxidation of SO2 by contact process is poisoned
by
ss***{Page 108 of 258}***ss
a) As2O3 b) V2O5 c) Fe2O3 d) CuCl2
15. Medicine used as an eye lotion is ______________
a) Silver sol b) colloidal gold
c) colloidal antimony d) milk of magnesia
16. Coconut charcoal has a great capacity of the__________
a) Adsorption b) absorption c) desorption d) all of these.
17. Emulsifying agent is used for___________
a) Precipitation of an emulsion b) coagulation of emulsion
c) Stabilization of an emulsion d) none of these
18. The function of FeCl3 in the conversion of Fe(OH)3 precipitate into a colloid is_
a) Peptizing agent b) emulsifying agent
c) reducing agent d) precipitating agent
19. An example of lyophilic colloid is______________
a) Sulphur in water b) phosphorus in water c) Starch d) all of these.
20. The blue colour of sky is due to _____________.
a)Tyndall effect b) Brownian mouement
c) Electro phoresis d) Electro-osmosis
21. Catalyst used in Deacon’s method of manufacture of chlorine is ____
a) NO b) CuCl2 c) Fe2O3 d) Ni
22. Argyrols is____________
a)Colloidal Ag b) colloidal Sb c) colloidal Au d) Mg (OH)2
23. The oxidation of sodium sulphate by air is retorted by____________
a) MnO2 b) H2S c) Alcohol d) As2O3
24. Ruby-Glass is a colloid of
a) Solid-sol b) Gel c) Emulsion d) Sol.
25. Electrophoresis is a ______ property of a colloid.
a) Optical b) Kinetic c) Electrical d) Magnetic
26. Decomposition Hydrogen peroxide is retarted in the presence of
a) Alcohol b) Glycerine c) Manganese dioxide d) Molybdenium
27. A substance which increase the activity of a catalyst------
a) positive catalyst b) negative catalyst
c) promoters d) catalytic poison
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What are promoters? Give example (June-2008, Mar-2010, and June-10,15)
Promoters
ss***{Page 109 of 258}***ss
The activity of a catalyst can be increased by addition of a small quantity of a
second material. A substance which, though itself not a catalyst, promotes the
activity of a catalyst is called a promoter.
Example:
In the Haber’s process for the synthesis of ammonia, traces of molybdenum
increase the activity of finely divided iron which acts as a catalyst.
2. What is catalytic poison? Give example (June-2007)

Catalytic poison
A substance which destroys the activity of the catalyst is called a catalytic
poison.
Example:
The platinum catalyst used in the oxidation of SO2 in contact process is
poisoned by arsenious oxide (As2O3).
3. What is Brownian movement? Give reason (June-2009,Mar-2012)

Brownian movement
 The continuous rapid zig-zag chaotic random and ceaseless movement
executed by a colloidal particle in the dispersion medium is called
Brownian movement.
 This is due to the unbalanced bombardment of the particles by the
molecules of the dispersion medium.
4. What is Tyndall’s effect?(Sep-2010,June-2011,Mar-2014)

Tyndall’s effect
When a strong beam of light is passed through a sol, the path of light is
illuminated by the scattering of light by colloidal particle.
The phenomenon of the scattering of light by the sol particles is called
Tyndall effect.
5. What is Helmholtz’s double layer?
Helmholtz’s double layer
 The surface of colloidal particle acquires a positive charge by selective
adsorption of a layer of positive ions around it.
 This layer attracts counter ions from the medium which form a second layer
of negative charges.
 The combination of the two layers of charges around the sol particle is
called Helmholtz double layer.
6. What is electrophoresis? (Mar-2006.Jun-2010,Mar-2013, oct - 2014)

Electrophoresis
The movement of sol particles under an applied electric potential is
called electrophoresis or cataphoresis.
ss***{Page 110 of 258}***ss
7. What is electro dialysis? (Oct-2008)

Electro dialysis
The process of removing ions (or molecules) from a sol by diffusion through a
permeable membrane is called Dialysis. Dialysis is carried under the influence
of electric field is called electro dialysis.
8. What is emulsion? What are emulsifying agents? (June-2006,13)

Emulsion
If a mixture of two immiscible or partially miscible liquids is shaken, a
coarse dispersion of one liquid in the other is obtained which is called emulsion.
Emulsifying agents
Emulsions of oil and water are unstable and sometimes they separate into
two layers on standing. For the stabilization of an emulsion, a third component
called emulsifying agent is usually added. The emulsifying agent forms an
interfacial film between suspended particles and the medium.
9. Write any three general characteristic of catalytic reaction? (Mar-2011)

General characteristic of catalytic reaction
 The catalyst remains unchanged in mass and in chemical composition at the
end of the reaction.
 Only a small quantity of catalyst is generally needed.
 A catalyst cannot initiate a reaction. The function of a catalyst is only to alter
the speed of the reaction which is already occurring at a particular rate.
10. Gas in gas colloidal solution is not formed why? (Mar-2007)
A colloidal solution of gas in gas is not possible as gases are completely
miscible and always form true solutions.
11. What is peptisation? Give an example (Mar-2009)

Peptisation
The dispersion of a precipitated material into colloidal solution by the
action of an electrolyte in solution is termed as peptisation.
 The electrolyte used is called a peptizing agent.
 Example: Silver chloride can be converted into a sol by adding
hydrochloric acid.
12. What is tanning? (Sep-2007)
Tanning
 Animal hides are colloidal in nature. When a hide, which positively
charged particles, is soaked in tannin, which contains negatively charged
ss***{Page 111 of 258}***ss

colloidal particles, mutual coagulation takes place, which results in the
hardening of leather. The process is termed as tanning.
 Chromium salts have been used in place of tannin.
13. What is heterogeneous catalysis? Give example (Mar-2008)

Heterogeneous catalysis
The catalytic process in which the reactants and the catalyst are in
different phases is known as heterogeneous catalysis.
Example:
14. Give three differences between physical adsorption and chemical

adsorption (Oct-2009)
S.No Physical adsorption Chemical adsorption
1. It is due to intermolecular It is due to chemical bond
Vander waal’s force. formation.
2. Heat of adsorption is small.
3. Reversible. Heat of adsorption is large.
Irreversible.
15. Define colloidal solution. (Oct-2012)

Colloidal solution
When the diameter of the particles of a substance dispersed in a solvent
ranges from about 10A° to 2000A°, the system is termed a colloidal solution.
16. What are lyophilic colloids? Give example.(Sep-2011)

Lyophilic colloids
Colloidal solutions in which the dispersed phase has considerable affinity
for the dispersion medium are called lyophilic (solvent loving) colloids.
Examples: Gelatin, protein and starch.
17. What are active centers? (Jun- 2012).
Active centers
 The catalytic surface has unbalanced chemical bonds on it. The reactant
gaseous molecules are adsorbed on the surface by these free bonds.
 This accelerates the rate of the reaction. The distribution of free bonds on
the catalytic surface is not uniform.
 These are crowded at the peaks, cracks and corners of the catalyst.
 The catalytic activity due to adsorption of reacting molecules is
maximum at these spots.
 These are, therefore, referred to as the active centres. If a catalyst has
more active centres, then its catalytic activity is increased.
ss***{Page 112 of 258}***ss

IMPORTANT:
1. What is adsorption?
Adsorption:
“The condition in which concentration of a substance in the interfacial
layers between two phases is greater than in the bulk of either phase, then
the substance is said to be adsorbed at the interface and the phenomenon is
known as adsorption”.
2. What is catalysis? Give example.

Catalysis
A catalyst is a substance which alters the speed of a chemical reaction
without itself undergoing any chemical change and the phenomenon is known as
catalysis. Example: Feused in Habber’s process. Or any one example from text.
3. What are the two types of catalysis?
Types of catalysis
Homogeneous catalysis and Heterogeneous catalysis.
4. Why colloids are purified?

 In the methods of preparation, the resulting sol frequently contains
besides colloidal particles appreciable amounts of electrolytes.
 To obtain the pure sol, these electrolytes have to be removed.
EXTRA:
1. What is Positive catalyst? Give examples.
Positive catalyst
A catalyst which enhances the speed of the reaction is called positive
catalyst.
Example: Decomposition of H2O2 in presence of colloidal platinum.
2. What is Negative catalyst? Give examples.

Negative catalyst
There are certain substances which, when added to the reaction mixture,
retard the reaction rate instead of increasing it. These are called negative
catalysts.
Example: Decomposition of hydrogen peroxide decreases in
presence of glycerine.
3. What is Auto catalyst? Give examples.(Jun -14)
Auto catalyst
In certain reactions, it is observed that one of the products formed during
the reaction acts as a catalyst for that reaction. Such type of catalyst is called
auto catalyst.
ss***{Page 113 of 258}***ss

Example: In the oxidation of oxalic acid by potassium permanganate, one
of the products MnSO4 acts as a auto-catalyst because it increases the speed of
the reaction.
4. What is Induced catalyst? Give examples.

Induced catalyst
When one reactant influences the rate of other reaction, which does not
occur under ordinary conditions, the phenomenon is known as induced
catalysis.
Example: Sodium arsenite solution is not oxidized by air. If, however, air is
passed through a mixture of the solution of sodium arsenite and sodium sulphite,
both of them undergo simultaneous oxidation. Thus sulphite has induced the
arsenite and hence is called induced catalyst.
5. What are adsorbent and adsorbate?

Adsorbent and Adsorbate:
 The solid that takes up gas or vapour or solute from a given solution is
called adsorbent. And
 The solute or gas which is held to surface of solid is known as adsorbate.
6. What are factors affecting adsorption?

Factors affecting adsorption
I Temperature
ii. Pressure
iii. Nature of the gas
iv. Nature of the adsorbent.
7. What are lyophobic colloids? Give example.
Lyophobic colloids
 Colloidal solutions in which the dispersed phase has very little affinity for
the dispersion medium are termed as lyophobic (solvent hating) colloids.
 Example: sulphur in water.
8. What is dialysis?
Dialysis
The process of removing ions (or molecules) from a sol by diffusion through a
permeable membrane is called Dialysis.
9. How is delta formed?
Delta
 River water is colloidal solution of clay.
ss***{Page 114 of 258}***ss
 Seawater contains a number of electrolytes.
 When river water meets the seawater, the electrolytes present in sea water
coagulate the colloidal solution of clay which getdeposited with the
formation of delta.
10. Give any three medicinal uses of colloids.

Medicinal uses of colloids
 Argyrols is a silver sol used as an eye lotion.
 Colloidal antimony is used in curing kalazar.
 Colloidal gold is used for intramuscular injection.
11. What is dispersed phase and dispersion medium?

Dispersed phase
 A colloidal system is made up of two phases. The substance distributed as the
colloidal particles is called the dispersed phase.
Dispersion medium
 The second continuous phase in which the colloidal particles are dispersed is
called the dispersion medium.
IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 66 (b) }
1. Differentiate the physical and chemical adsorption.(Any five)
S.No Physical adsorption Chemical adsorption

1. Due to intermolecular Vander Due to chemical bond formation.
waal’s force.
2. Heat of adsorption is small. Heat of adsorption is large.
3. Reversible. Irreversible.
4. Decrease with increase of Increase with increase of
temperature. temperature.
5. Forms multi molecular layers. Forms uni molecular layer.
2. Write briefly about the adsorption theory of catalysis.

Adsorption Theory:
It explains the mechanism of heterogeneous catalysis. Here, the
catalyst functions by adsorption of the reacting molecules on its surface.
ss***{Page 115 of 258}***ss

Four steps involved in the heterogeneous catalysis.
Catalyst
A(g) + B(g ) → C(g) + D(g)
Step - 1.(Adsorption of reactant molecules):

The reactant molecules A and B strike the surface of the catalyst by
weak Vander Waal’s forces or by partial chemical bonds.
Step - 2.(Formation of Activated complex):

The particles of the reactants adjacent to one another join to form an
intermediate complex (A-B) . The activated complex is unstable.
Step - 3.(Decomposition of Activated complex):

The activated complex breaks to form the products C and D. These
separated particles of the products hold to the catalyst surface by partial
chemical bonds.
Step - 4.(Desorption of Products):

The particles of the products are desorbed or released from the surface.
3. Write briefly on intermediate compound formation theory of catalysis with

an example.
The Intermediate Compound Formation Theory:
According to this theory,
C
A + B → AB
Which occurs in presence of a catalyst C, may take place as
A + C → AC
Catalyst Intermediate
Compound
AC + B → AB + C
Product Catalyst
Many catalytic reactions can be explained on the basis of this theory.
Example:
The catalytic oxidation of SO2 to SO3 in the lead chamber process:
(If A= O2 , B=2SO2 , C=2NO)
2NO
2SO2 + O2 → 2SO3
2NO + O2 → 2NO2
Catalyst Intermediate compound
2NO2 + 2SO2 → 2SO3 + 2NO
ss***{Page 116 of 258}***ss
Product Catalyst
4. Explain the chemical methods of preparation of colloids.
Chemical Methods:
(i)Double decomposition: As2O3 + 3 H2S → As2S3(yellow) + 3 H2O
Excess H2S is removed by passing in a stream of hydrogen.
(ii)Oxidation: 2H2S + SO2 → 2H2O + 3 S
(iii)Reduction: AgNO3 + tannic acid → Ag Sol
AuCl3 + tannic acid → Au Sol
(iv)Hydrolysis:
Colloidal solutions of the hydroxides of Fe, Cr, Al etc can be prepared
by hydrolysis of their salts.
FeCl3 + 3H2O → Fe(OH)3 + 3HCl
Red sol
5. Explain-dialysis process.
a).Dialysis:
 Animal membranes (bladder) or those made of parchment paper and
cellophane sheet, have very fine pores. These pores permit ions (or
small molecules) to pass through but not the large colloidal particles.
 When a sol containing dissolved ions (electrolyte) or molecules is placed in
a bag of semipermeable membrane dipping in pure water, the ions diffuse
through the membrane.
 By using a continuous flow of fresh water, the concentration of the
electrolyte outside the membrane tends to be zero.
 Thus diffusion of the ions into pure water remains brisk all the time. In this
way, practically all the electrolyte present in the sol can be removed easily.
 The process of
removing ions (or
molecules) from a
sol by diffusion
through a
permeable
membrane is
called Dialysis. The
apparatus used for
dialysis is called a Dialyser.
Dialysis of a sol containing ions and molecule
6. Write notes on electrophoresis.
Electrophoresis:
 If electric potential is applied across two platinum electrodes immersed in a
hydrophilic sol, the dispersed particles move toward one or the other
electrode.
ss***{Page 117 of 258}***ss

 The movement of sol particles under an applied electric potential is
called electrophoresis or cataphoresis.
 If the sol particles here negatively charged, they migrate toward the positive
electrode.
 On the other hand, if they have positively charged they move toward the
negative electrode.
 From the direction of movement of the sol particles, we can determine the
charge of the sol particles
Electrophoresis of a sol
 The phenomenon of electrophoresis can be demonstrated by placing a layer of
As2S3 sol under two limbs of a U-tube.
 When a potential difference of about 100 volts is applied across the two
platinum electrodes dipping in deionized water, it is observed that the level of
the sol drops on the negative electrode side and rises on the positive
electrode side (Fig.)
 This shows that As2S3 sol has migrated to the positive electrode, indicating
that the particles are negatively charged.
7. Write notes on electro osmosis.
Electro osmosis:
 In a sol, the dispersion medium carries an equal but opposite charge to that of
the dispersed particles.
 Thus, the medium will move in opposite direction to the dispersed phase
under the influence of applied electric potential.
 The movement of the dispersion medium under the influence of applied
potential is known as electro-osmosis.
 The phenomenon of electro osmosis can be demonstrated by using a U-tube
in which a plug of wet clay (a negative colloid) is fixed.
 The two limbs of the tube are filled with water to the same level. The platinum
electrodes are immersed in water and potential applied across them.
ss***{Page 118 of 258}***ss
 It will be observed that water level rises on the cathode side and falls on
anode side.
Electro-osmosis
 This movement of the medium towards the negative electrode shows
that the charge on the medium is positive.
Similarly, for a positively charged colloid electro-osmosis will take place
in the reverse direction.
8. Explain dispersion method of preparation of colloids.
Dispersion Methods
1. Mechanical dispersion using colloidal mill
 The solid along with the liquid is fed into a colloidal mill.
 The colloidal mill consists of two steel plates nearly touching each other and
rotating in opposite directions with high speed.
 The solid particles are ground down to colloidal size and then dispersed in
the liquid.Colloidal graphite and printing inks are made by this method.
Colloidal mill
2. Electro-dispersion method: (Bredig’s Arc Method)

 This method is suitable for the preparation of colloidal solution of metals
like gold, silver, platinum etc.
ss***{Page 119 of 258}***ss

 An arc is struck between the metal electrodes under the surface of water
containing some stabilising agent such as trace of alkali.
 The water is cooled by immersing the container in a cold bath.
 The intense heat of the arc vapourises some of the metal which condenses
under cold water.
Electro-dispersion
3. Ultra-sonic dispersion :
 The sound waves of high frequency are usually called ultra-sonic waves.
 Ultrasonic waves are passed through the solution containing larger particles.
They break down to form colloidal solution.
4. Peptisation :
 The dispersion of a precipitated material into colloidal solution by the action
of an electrolyte in solution is termed as peptisation.
 The electrolyte used is called a peptizing agent.
 A few examples are
1. Silver chloride can be converted into a sol by adding hydrochloric
acid.
2. Ferric hydroxide yields a sol by adding ferric chloride.
9. Give the general characteristics of catalytic reactions.
General characteristics of catalytic reactions

1. The catalyst remains unchangedin mass and in chemical composition at
the end of the reaction.
2. Only asmall quantity of catalyst is generally needed.
3. A catalyst cannot initiate a reaction. The function of a catalyst is only to
alter the speed of the reaction which is already occurring at particular rate.
4. A catalyst does not alter the position of equilibrium in a reversible
reaction.
5. The catalyst is generally specific in its action.
10. Explain the Factors affecting adsorption.
ss***{Page 120 of 258}***ss

Factors affecting adsorption:
The magnitude of gaseous adsorption depends upon the following factors:
i. Temperature
ii. Pressure
iii. Nature of the gas and
iv. Nature of the adsorbent.
Effect of temperature and pressure:
Adsorption is invariably accompanied by evolution of heat. Therefore, in
accordance with Le chatelier’s principle, the magnitude of adsorption increases
with decrease in temperature. Further, since adsorption of a gas leads to
decrease of pressure, the magnitude of adsorption increases with increase in
pressure. Thus, decrease of temperature and increase of pressure both tend to
cause increase in the magnitude of adsorption of a gas on a solid.
Nature of the gas:
It is observed that the more readily soluble and easily liquefiable gases
such as ammonia, chlorine and sulphur dioxide are adsorbed more than the
hydrogen, nitrogen and oxy gen. The reason is that Vander waal’s or
intermolecular forces which are involved in adsorption are more predominant
in the former than in the latter.
Nature of the adsorbent:
Adsorption is a surface phenomenon. Therefore, the greater the surface
area per unit mass of the adsorbent, the greater is its capacity for adsorption
under the given conditions of temperature and pressure.
13. ELECTRO CHEMISTRY - I

1. The process in which chemical change occurs on passing electricity is termed as__
a) Neutralization b) hydrolysis c) electrolysis d) ionisation
2. The laws of electrolysis were enunciated first by...............
a) Dalton b) Faraday c) Kekule d) Avogadro
3. When one coulomb of electricity is passed through an electrolytic solution, the
mass deposited on the electrode is equal to...............
a) Equivalent weight b) molecular weight
c) Electrochemical equivalent d) one gram
4. Faraday’s laws of electrolysis are related to...............
ss***{Page 121 of 258}***ss
a) atomic number of the cation b) atomic number of the anion
c) Equivalent weight of the electrolyte d) speed of the cation
5. The specific conductance of a 0.01 M solution of KCl is 0.0014 Ohm-1 cm-1at 250C.
Its equivalent conductance is...............
a) 14 ohm-1 cm2 eq-1 b) 140 ohm-1 cm2 eq-1
c) 1.4 ohm-1 cm2 eq-1 d) 0.14 ohm-1 cm2 eq-1
6. The equivalent conductivity of CH3COOH at 250C is 80 ohm-1 cm2eq-1anat infinite
dilution 400 ohm-1 cm2 eq-1. The degree of dissociation of CH3COOH is...............
a) 1 b) 0.2 c) 0.1 d) 0.3
7. When sodium acetate is added to acetic acid, the degree of ionisation of acetic
acid.
a) Increases b) decreases
c) Does not change d) becomes zero
8. NH4OH is a weak base because...............
a) It has low vapour pressure b) it is only partially ionized
c) It is completely ionized d) it has low density
9. Which one of the following formulae represents Ostwald’s dilution law for a
binary electrolyte whose degree of dissociation α and concentration C.
a) K=(1-α)C/α b) K= α2C/(1-α) c) K=(1-α)C/α2 d) K=α2C/(1-α)C.
10. Ostwald’s dilution law is applicable in the case of the solution of......
a) CH3COOH b) NaCl c) NaOH d) H2SO4
11. Which one of the following relationship is correct?
a) pH= 1/[H+] b) pH = log10[H+] c) log10pH= [H+] d) pH = log101/[H+]
12.When 10-6 mole of a monobasic strong acid is dissolved in one liter of solvent, the
pH of the solution is..............
a) 6 b) 7 c) less than 6 d) more than 7
13. When pH of a solution is 2, the hydrogen ion concentration in moles litre-1 is....
a) 1 x10-12 b) 1 x10-2 c) 1 x10-7 d) 1 x10-4
14. The pH of a solution containing 0.1 N NaOHsolutionsis..........
a) 1 b) 10-1 c) 13 d) 10-13
15. A solution which is resistant to changes of pH on addition of small Amounts of

an acid or a base is known as.............
a) Buffer solution b) true solution
c) Isohydric solution d) ideal solution
16. The hydrogen ion concentration of a buffer solution consisting of a weak acid
and its salt is given by.............
a) [H+] = Ka[Acid]/[Salt] b) [H+] = Ka [Salt]
c) [H+] = Ka [Acid] d) [H+] = Ka[Salt]/[Acid]
17. Indicators used in acid-base titrations are...........
a) Strong organic acids b) Strong organic bases
c) Weak organic acids or weak organic bases d) Non-electrolysis
ss***{Page 122 of 258}***ss
18. For the titration between oxalic acid and sodium hydroxide, the indicator used
a) Potassium permanganate b) phenolphthalein
c) Litmus d) methyl orange

1. Indicator used in the titration of ammonium hydroxide with hydrochloric acid
a) KMnO4 b) Methyl Orange c) phenolphthalein d) Litmus
2. If 0.2 ampere can deposit 0.1978g of copper in 50 minutes, how much of copper
will be deposited by 600 coulombs?
a) 19.78g b) 1.978g c) 0.1978g d) 197.8g
3. The value of enthalpy of neutralization of strong acid by strong base is :
a) - 87.32 kJ equiv -1 b) - 57.32 kJ equiv-1
c) - 72.57 kJ equiv-1 d) - 72.23 kJ equiv-1
4. For the titration between HCl and sodium carbonate, the indicator used is ---
a) KMnO4 c) phenolphthalein d) Litmus b) Methyl Orange
5. The number of moles of electron required to discharge one mole of Al+3 is
a) 3 b) 1 c) 2 d) 4
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What is common ion effect? Give example (Oct-2006, July-2007, Oct-2007,
Mar-2008,Mar-2010,Mar-2011,14,Jun -14)
Common ion effect
The reduction of the degree of dissociation of a salt by the addition of a
common-ion is called the Common-ion effect.
Example: In a saturated solution of silver chloride, we have the equilibrium
AgCl(s) → Ag+(aq) + Cl-(aq)
When sodium chloride is added to the solution, the concentration of Cl– ions
will increase. The equilibrium shown above will be shifted to the left to form
more of solid AgCl. Thus the solubility of AgCl, a typical sparingly soluble salt, will
decrease.
2. What are buffer solutions? Give examples (June-2010,June-2011,Sep-
2010,Mar-2012, Jun-2012)
Buffer solutions
A buffer solution is one which maintains its pH fairly constant even upon
the addition of small amounts of acid or base.
Example: CH3COOH + CH3COONa (or) NH4OH + NH4Cl.
3. State Kohlraush’s law. (Jun-2006, Oct-2008, Oct-2009,Oct-2012)

Kohlraush’s law
ss***{Page 123 of 258}***ss
‘‘at infinite dilution wherein the ionization of all electrolytes is complete, each
ion migrates independently and contributes a definite value to the total
equivalent conductance of the electrolyte’’.
4. State Faraday’s law of electrolysis. ( Mar-2006,Mar-2013)

Faraday’s First law: (jun-2015)
The mass of the substance (m) liberated at the electrodes during the
electrolysis is directly proportional to the quantity of electricity (Q) that
passes through the electrolyte.
Faraday’s Second law:

When the same quantity of electricity passes through solutions of different
electrolytes, the amounts of the substances liberated at the electrodes are directly
proportional to their chemical equivalents.
5. Define-electro chemical equivalent. (June-2009, oct - 2014)

Electro chemical equivalent
The electrochemical equivalent is the amount of a substance deposited by
1 ampere current passing for 1 second (i.e., one coulomb).
6. State Ostwald dilution law. (Mar-2009, 15)

Ostwald dilution law
Ostwald’s dilution law relates the dissociation constant of the weak
electrolyte with the degree of dissociation and the concentration of the weak
electrolyte.
Ka= α2C
7. What is equivalent conductance? Give its unit. (June-2008)

Equivalent conductance
Equivalent conductance (λc) is defined as the conductance of an electrolyte
solution containing one gram equivalent of the electrolyte.
(λc) = κ xV Unit: mho.m2. (gm. equiv)-1
8. What is cell constant? Give its unit. (Mar-2010)

Cell constant
l=length, a= area of cross section.
ss***{Page 124 of 258}***ss

9. Why does metallic conduction decrease with increase in temperature.(Sep-
2011)
 Due the enhanced thermal vibration of metal atoms disrupting the
movement of electrons passing through them.
10. What do mean ionic product of water? (Jun-2013)

Ionic product of water
Water is a weak electrolyte. The dissociation equilibrium of water can be
considered as,
Since water as a solvent is always in excess and change in concentration due

its dissociation is negligible. Hence water concentration is assumed to be
constant.
Keq[H2O]2 = [H3O+] [OH–] = Kw
The constant Kw is called as the ionic product of water and its value is given
by the product of concentrations of hydronium (H3O+) and hydroxide (OH–) ions. At
298 K, Kw = 1x 10-14 mol2.dm-6.
IMPORTANT:
1. Define-Faraday.
Faraday
Quantity of electricity required to liberate one gram equivalent of a
substance is 96,495 coulombs. This quantity of electricity is known as Faraday
and is denoted by the symbol F.
2. Differentiate between electrolytic conductor and metallic conductor.

S.No Metallic conductor Electrolytic conductor
1. Pure metals and their solid Electrovalent (or) ionic compounds
solutions such as alloys are conduct electricity
called as metallic conductors.
2. There is no chemical change in Chemical change occurs.
the material when electricity is
passed.
3. There is only flow of electrical There is actual transfer of matter
energy but there is no transfer since ions move towards respective
of matter. electrodes.
ss***{Page 125 of 258}***ss

3. What are insulators? Give examples.
Insulators
Those substances which do not allow electrical current to pass through
them are known as insulators.
Examples: wood, silk, cotton, glass, rubber, organic compounds like
benzene and carbon tetrachloride.
4. What are indicators?
Indicators
An indicator is a substance which indicates the completion of a reaction
by sharp colour change at the end point without taking part in the reaction.
Examples: phenolphthalein and methyl orange.
5. Define specific conductance? Give its units.

Specific conductance
The reciprocal of specific resistance is called as specific conductance (or)
specific conductivity (ĸ) [ĸ is called ‘kappa’].
ĸ is defined as the conductance of one metre cube of an electrolyte
solution.
Unit of specific conductance is ohm-1 m-1 (or)

mho.m-1
Since ohm-1 = mho. (or) 1 siemen = 1 mho.
ĸ is also expressed as S.m-1.
6. What is Henderson equation?
Henderson equation
(or)
EXTRA:
1. What is molar conductance? Give its unit.
Molar conductance
Molar conductance ‘μC’ is defined as the conductance of a solution containing
one mole of the electrolyte dissolved in it.
Where, M is the molarity of the

electrolyte solution.
2. Phenolphthalein is not a suitable indicator for the titration of strong acid

and week base why?
ss***{Page 126 of 258}***ss

In this titration, pH changes from 3.5 to 7.5 at the end point. The best
indicator for this type of titration is methyl orange which changes its colour
within this pH range. But pH range of Phenolphthalein is 8.3 to 10.
3. What are semiconductors? Give example.

Semiconductors
Those substances that allow the electrical current to pass through them
partially (or) possess very low electrical conductivity are known as
semiconductors.
Examples: Silicon,Germanium, oxides of Manganese, Cobalt oxide,
Titanium dioxide etc.
4. Methyl orange is not a suitable for the titration of strong base and week acid
why?
There is a little change in the pH value at the end point in this type of
titration. The pH value changes from 6.5 to 10. Thus phenolphthalein is the
suitable indicator for this titration as its working range is 8.3 – 10.
Methyl orange is not a suitable indicator. Since it has a working range

below pH 5.
5. Define specific resistance (ρ). Give its unit.
Specific resistance (ρ)
ρ is called the specific resistance and it is resistance in ohms which one

meter cube of material offers to the passage of electricity through it.
Unit: ohm-meter.
6. Define pH scale.
pH scale: The scale on which pH values are computed is called the pH

scale. It is defined as the negative of the base-10 logarithm (log) of the H+
concentration. pH = – log10 [H+]
7. Define pH indicators.
pH indicators
Those substances which change to specific colours in different pH range

values of the medium are called as pH indicators. Incidentally pH indicators are
used as acid-base indicators also.
ss***{Page 127 of 258}***ss

1. Give an account of Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation.

THEORY OF ELECTROLYTIC CONDUCTANCE:
Arrhenius theory of electrolytic conductance is also known as Arrhenius
theory of ionisation since electrolytic dissociation into ions is considered here.
Postulates of Arrhenius Theory:

 When dissolved in water, neutral electrolyte molecules are split up into
two types of charged particles. These particles were called ions and the
process was termed ionisation.
(i) Positively charge – cations; (ii) Negative charge- anions.
A+ B–→ A+ + B–
 The ions present in solution constantly reunite to form neutral
molecules. Thus there is a state of equilibrium between the undissociated
molecules and the ions.
AB A+ + B–
Applying the Law of Mass Action to the ionic equilibrium we have,
[A+ ][B- ]
K = -------------
[AB]
Where, K is called the Dissociation constant.
 The charged ions are free to move through the solution to the oppositely
charged electrode. This is called as migration of ions. This movement of the
ions constitutes the electric current through electrolysis.
 The electrical conductivity of an electrolyte solution depends on the
number of ions present in solution.
 Presence of hydrogen ions (H+) renders the solution acidic while presence of
hydroxide ions (OH–) renders the solution basic.
 There are two types of electrolytes. Strong electrolytes are completely
ionized in water. e.g. HCl. Weak electrolytes are partially ionized in water.
e.g. CH3COOH
2. Explain Oswald’s dilution law.
Ostwald’s dilution law for weak electrolytes

Ostwald’s dilution law relates the dissociation constant of the
weak electrolyte with the degree of dissociation and the concentration
of the weak electrolyte.
Consider the dissociation equilibrium of CH3COOH which is a weak
electrolyte in water
ss***{Page 128 of 258}***ss

α is the degree of dissociation .
CH3COOH CH3COO- H+
Initial no. of moles 1 - -
No.of moles - -
dissociated at time α
‘t’
No.of mole (1- α) α α
remaining at
equilibrium
Equilibrium c(1- α) Cα Cα
Concentration
ss***{Page 129 of 258}***ss

3. Derive Henderson’s equations.

Henderson equation:
The pH of an acid buffer can be calculated from the dissociation constant, Ka,
of the weak acid and the concentrations of the acid and the salt used. The
dissociation expression of the weak acid, HA, may be represented as
The weak acid is only slightly dissociated and its dissociation is further
depressed by the addition of the salt (Na+ A–) which provides A– ions (Common ion
effect). As a result the equilibrium concentration of the unionised acid is nearly
equal to the initial concentration of the acid. The equilibrium concentration [A–] is
presumed to be equal to the initial concentration of the salt added since it is
completely dissociated. Thus we can write the equation (1) as
Where [acid] is the initial concentration of the added acid and [salt] that of the
salt used.
Taking negative logs of both sides of the equation (2), we have
ss***{Page 130 of 258}***ss

This relationship is called the Henderson-Hassel balch equation (or) for a
basic buffer can be,
4. Write notes on Quinonoid theory of acid – base indicators.
Quinonoid Theory:
 The colour change of an acid-base indicator arises as a result of
structural change.
 Indicator existsas an equilibrium mixture of two tautomeric forms
namely, benzenoid and quinonoid forms.
 In acidic medium – Benzenoid form – Colourless.

In Basic medium – Quinonoid form – Pink Colour.
 One of the tautomers is a weak acid or a weak base.
 The two forms possess two different colours in different medium.
 The pH of the solution containing the indicator is changed; the solution
shows a change of colour.
 The colour change is due to the fact that one tautomer changes over to
the other, For example,
Phenolphthalein is tautomeric mixture of the two forms.
ss***{Page 131 of 258}***ss

5. Write notes on Ostwald’s theory of acid – base indicators.
Ostwald’s theory(Example-Phenolphthalein)
 The acid-base indicator is either a weak acid or a weak base.
 They are partially ionised in solution. The ionised and unionised forms
have different colours.
 The indicator exists predominantly in one of the two forms depending on
the nature of the medium and hence there is colour change when the
nature of the medium changes. Phenolphthalein is a weak acid and it is
partially ionised in solutions.
HPh H+ + Ph–
Unionised form ionised form
(colourless) (Pink)
 In acidic medium, excess H ions are present which suppress the
+
dissociation of HPh due to common ion effect. Hence it is colourless.

 In alkaline medium, The OH– ion neutralizes H+ ion to form water. Hence it is
pink in colour. (or)
Explain using Methyl orange as it is in book
ss***{Page 132 of 258}***ss

6. Explain the buffer action in an acidic buffer.
Buffer action:
A buffer solution is one which maintains its pH fairly constant even
upon the addition of small amount of acid or base.
e.g., Acidic buffer: (CH3COOH + CH3COONa).
Basic buffer: (NH4OH + NH4Cl)
Buffer action in an acid buffer:
Buffer solution contains (CH3COOH + CH3COONa).
CH3COOH H+ + CH3COO–
CH3COONa → Na+ + CH3COO–
Since the salt is completely ionised, it provides the common ions CH3COO–in
excess. The common ion effect suppresses the ionisation of acetic acid.
1. Addition of HCl.
 Upon the addition of HCl, the decrease of H+ ions is counteracted by
association with the excess of acetate ions to form unionised CH3COOH.
 Thus the added H+ ions are neutralised and the pH of the buffer solution
remains unchanged.
H+ + CH3COO–→ CH3COOH
2. Addition of NaOH.
 The added OH-combine with CH3COOHto giveCH3COO–and H2O.
 Thus, pH of buffer solution is maintained almost constant.
CH3COOH + OH- CH3COO– + H2O
7. Explain the buffer action in a basic buffer.
Buffer action:
A buffer solution is one which maintains its pH fairly constant even upon
the addition of small amount of acid or base.
e.g., Acidic buffer: (CH3COOH + CH3COONa).
Basic buffer: (NH4OH + NH4Cl)
Buffer action in a basic buffer.
Buffer solution containing (NH4OH + NH4Cl)

NH4OH NH4+ + OH-
NH4Cl NH4+ + Cl-
Since the salt is completely ionised, it provides the common ions NH4+in excess. The
common ion effect suppresses the ionisation of NH4OH.
1. Addition of HCl.
 Addition of HCl the H+ ions combine with NH4OH to form NH4+ and H2O. pH
is retained (almost constant).
NH4OH +H+ NH4+ + H2O
ss***{Page 133 of 258}***ss

2. Addition of NaOH
 The addedOH– ions combine with NH4+ ions present in the buffer solution to
give NH4OH and hence PH is maintained (unchanged).
NH4+ + OH- NH4OH
8. Write about the evidences of Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation.
Evidences of Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
 The enthalpy of neutralization of strong acid by strong base is a constant

value and equal to -57.32 KJ mol-1.
(H+ + OH-→ H2O ∆H = -57.32 KJ mol-1)
 The colour of certain salts or their solution is due to the ions present.
(e.g., copper sulphate is blue due to Cu2+ ions).
 Ostwald’s dilution law, Common ion effect and solubility product are
based on this theory only.
 Chemical reaction between electrolytes is almost ionic reactions.
Because these are essentially the reaction between oppositely charged
ions. Ag+ + Cl-→ AgCl
 Electrolytic solutions conduct current due to the presence of ions which
migrate in the presence of electric field.
14. ELECTRO CHEMISTRY - II
III &IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 59 &67 (b) }
1. Give the IUPAC recommendations for writing cell diagram.
IUPAC Conventions. (E.g.)For Zinc-Copper cell.
(1) A single vertical line (|) represents a phase boundary between metal
electrode and ion solution (electrolyte).
(2) It may be noted that the metal electrode in anode half-cell is on the left, while
in cathode half-cell it is on the right of the metal ion.
ss***{Page 134 of 258}***ss

(3) A double vertical line (||) represents the salt bridge, porous partition or any
other means of permitting ion flow while preventing the electrolyte from
mixing.
(4) Anode half-cell is written on the left and cathode half-cell on the right. The
zinc-copper cell can now be written as
(5) The symbol for an inert electrode, like the platinum electrode is often enclosed
in a bracket. For example,
(6) The value of emf of a cell is written on the right of the cell diagram.
Thus a zinc-copper cell has emf 1.1 V and is represented as
If the emf acts in the opposite direction through the cell circuit it is
denoted as a negative value.
E = (+ve), it is Spontaneous reaction.

E = (+ve), it is Non-Spontaneous reaction.
2. Derive Nernst equation.
ss***{Page 135 of 258}***ss

ss***{Page 136 of 258}***ss

3. Write an account on cell terminology.
Cell Terminology
 Current is the flow of electrons through a wire or any conductor.
 Electrode is the material: a metallic rod/bar/strip which conducts electrons
into and out of a solution.
ss***{Page 137 of 258}***ss

 Anode is the electrode at which oxidation occurs. It sends electrons into the
outer circuit. It has negative charge and is shown as (–) in cell diagrams.
 Cathode is the electrode at which electrons are received from the outer
circuit. It has a positive charge and is known as (+) in the cell diagrams.
 Electrolyte is the salt solution in a cell.
 Anode compartment is the compartment of the cell in which oxidation half-
reaction occurs. It contains the anode.
 Cathode compartment is the compartment of the cell in which reduction
half-reaction occurs. It contains the cathode.
 Half-cell. Each half of an electrochemical cell, where oxidation occur sand the
half where reduction occurs, is called the half cell.
4. How is SHE constructed? Explain its function.
Standard Hydrogen Electrode - (SHE):
Standard Hydrogen Electrode
 The standard hydrogen half-cell or Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE),is

selected for coupling with the unknown half-cell.
 It consists of a platinum electrode immersed in a 1 M solution of H+ ions
maintained at 25oC.
 Hydrogen gas at one atmosphere enters the glass hood and bubbles over
the platinum electrode.
 The hydrogen gas at the platinum electrode passes into solution, forming H+
ions and electrons.
 The emf of the standard hydrogen electrode is arbitrarily assigned the
value of zero volts. So, SHE can be used as a standard for other
electrodes.
(i) SHE acts as Cathode:
ss***{Page 138 of 258}***ss

 When it is placed on the right-hand side of the zinc electrode, the hydrogen
electrode reaction is 2H++ 2e–→H2
The electrons flow to the SHE and it acts as the cathode.
(ii) SHE acts as Anode:
When the SHE is placed on the left hand side, the electrode reaction is
H2→ 2H++ 2e–
The electrons flow to the copper electrode and the hydrogen electrode as the
anode. The emf of half cell Zn | Zn2+ = - 0.76 V
The emf of half cell Cu | Cu2+ = - 0.34 V
So, E0 cell = E0R - E0L= (+0.34) – ( -0.76) = 1.1 V.
 Evidently, the SHE can act both as anode and cathode and,there fore can be
used to determine the emf of any other half-cell electrode(or single electrode).
5. Establish a relation between free energy and emf.
Relation between EMF and free energy:

 When a cell produces a current, the current can be used to do work – to run a
motor, for instance.
 Thermodynamic principles can be employed to derive a relation between
electrical energy and the maximum amount of work, Wmax, obtainable from
the cell.
 The maximum amount of work obtainable from the cell is the product of
charge flowing per mole and maximum potential difference, E, through which
the charge is transferred.
Wmax = – n FE ... (1)
Where, n is the number of moles of electrons transferred and is equal to
the valence of the ion participating in the cell reaction.
F stands for Faraday and is equal to 96,495 coulombs and E is the emf
of the cell.
 According to thermodynamics, the maximum work that can be derived from a
chemical reaction is equal to the free energy (∆G) for the reaction,
Wmax = ∆G ... (2)
Therefore, from (1) and (2), we can write
∆G = – n FE ... (3)
ss***{Page 139 of 258}***ss

 Thus only when E has a positive value, ∆G value will be negative and the cell
reaction will be spontaneous and the e.m.f. of the cell can be measured.
 Here E refers to the Ecell.Thus, the electrical energy supplied by the cell is
(nFE) equal to the free energy decrease (–∆G) of the cell reaction occurring in
the cell.
6. How is e.m.f. of a half cell determined?
Determination of emf of a half-cell:
 By a single electrode potential, we also mean the emf of an isolated half-cell or

its half-reaction.
 The emf of a cell that is made of two half-cells can be determined by
connecting them to a voltmeter.
 However, there is no way of measuring the emf of a single half-cell directly.
 The emf of the newly constructed cell, E is determined with a voltmeter.
 The emf of the unknown half-cell Eo can then be calculated from the
expression
Emeasured = ER – EL
If the standard half-cell acts as anode, the equation becomes

ER = Emeasured (where, EL = 0)
On the other hand, if standard half-cell is cathode, the equation takes the form
EL = – Emeasured (where, ER = 0)
*****s*****All the Best*****s*****
Note: Workout all book example and book back problems for {Q.No.59}
ss***{Page 140 of 258}***ss

15.ISOMERISM IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (Q.No.45)

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Meso tartaric acid is optically inactive-justify your answer. (Mar-2006, Oct-
2006,Mar-2010,Mar-2013, oct - 2014)
 In Meso tartaric acid one asymmetric carbon is dextro rotatory and other is
laevo rotatory.
 Both rotating the same extant but in opposite direction.
 So, the net result is optically inactive and is due to Internal compensation
(or) Inherent symmetry in the molecule.
2. Distinguish between enantiomers and diasteremoers. (June-2006,Mar-

2012, Jun-2012)
S.No Enantiomers Diasteremoers
1. same magnitude but different Differ in the magnitude of optical
sign of optical rotation. rotation.
Non-super imposable object

2. mirror image relationship. They are never mirror images.
Separation of enantiomers is a
tedious process.
3. Separation from the other pairs of
enantiomers is easy.
3. Distinguish between racemic mixture and meso form. (Mar-2007,Jun-

2010,Sep-2010,Mar-2011,Oct-2012,Jun-13,14,15)
S.No Racemic form Meso form
1. It is a mixture that can be It is a single compound and cannot
separated into two optically be separated.
hence active forms.
2. Optically inactive due to Optically inactive due to internal
external compensation. compensation.
ss***{Page 141 of 258}***ss
3. Molecules of isomers present Molecules are achiral.
are chiral.
4. What are the conditions for optical activity? (Oct-2007,Mar-2009)

Conditions for optical activity
 ‘Chirality’ (or) Asymmetric carbon (or) non-super imposable is ‘the essential
and the sufficient’ condition for a molecule to be optically active.
5. What is racemic mixture? Give example. (Mar-2008,Sep-09,Jun-09,Mar-14)

Racemic mixture
When equal amounts of d-isomer and l-isomer are mixed one gets a ‘‘racemic
mixture’’.E.g. Mixture of d & l – Lactic acid.This process is called recemisation.
6. What are optical isomers? Give example.(Jun-2008)

Optical isomers
 The compounds have the same molecular formula but possessing different
spatial arrangement of atoms or groups and different in the rotation of plane
polarized light. E.g. d& l - Lactic acid.
7. Give the structure of cis-trans isomers of 2-pentene.(Sep-2011)
8. Trans-isomer is more stable than cis-isomer .Why?(June-2011)

In the cis isomer because similar groups are very near each other,
Vander Waals repulsion and steric hindrance make the molecule much
unstable.
In the trans isomer, similar groups are diagonally opposite to each other.
Hence there is no such steric interaction.
Generally trans isomer is more stable than cis isomer.
9.Practice E& Z isomers for text book example and book back examples.
IMPORTANT:
1. Explain the following with examples.
(a) Cis-trans isomerism (b) optical isomerism.
(a) Cis-trans isomerism:
The isomer in which similar groups lie on the same side is called ‘cis isomer’ (I).
ss***{Page 142 of 258}***ss
The other in which similar groups lie in opposite direction is called ‘Trans
isomer’ (II). Example:
(b) optical isomerism:

An asymmetric molecule is not superimposable on its mirror image. That
means an optically active molecule has more than [at least two] one
configuration. [Configuration refers to three dimensional arrangements of
atoms in a molecule] that is, an optically active molecule exhibits isomerism
which is called optical isomerism.
EXTRA:
1. What is geometrical isomerism? Give example.
Geometrical isomerism
Isomerism that arises out of difference in the spatial arrangement of
atoms or groups about the doubly bonded carbon atoms is called
Geometrical isomerism. Example:
2. What is asymmetric carbon?

Asymmetric carbon
A carbon atom attached to four different atoms or groups is called
‘‘asymmetric carbon atom’’.
3. What is chirality?
ss***{Page 143 of 258}***ss

Chirality: Chirality means handedness or non super imposability.
Right hand and left hand, Right leg shoe and left leg shoe are examples of
objects having handedness or the property of chirality and non super
imposability.
4. Give the structure of E-Z isomer of But-2-ene 1, 4 dioic acid.
Z-Isomer E- Isomer
Five Mark Question & Answers:
1. Distinguish enantiomers from diastereomers. Give an example each.
2. Distinguish racemic form from meso form with suitable example.
ss***{Page 144 of 258}***ss

3. Discuss the optical isomerism in tartaric acid.
The enantiomers of tartaric acid have the same magnitude but different
sign of optical rotation. They have object-mirror image relationship.
In the d-isomer, each of the two asymmetric carbon atoms rotate the plane
of the polarised light towards right leading to overall dextro rotation.
In the same way in the l - isomer, the overall rotation is laevo.
There is another optical isomer for tartaric acid in which one asymmetric
carbon atom is dextrorotatory and the other laevorotatory-both rotating to the
same extent in opposite directions.
The net result is, that this isomer becomes optically inactive and is called
the ‘‘Meso’’ isomer.
ss***{Page 145 of 258}***ss

Though the Meso isomer has two asymmetric

carbon atoms the configuration of one carbon is the mirror image of the
other, the net result being the molecule as a whole becomes symmetric.
This molecule is said to have a symmetric plane, which divides the

molecule into two equal halves. The molecule becomes‘‘achiral’’. It has
configuration which is super imposable on its mirror image.
The optical inactivity of the ‘Meso’ isomer is due to the internal
compensation. It is due to the inherent symmetry in the molecule.
Mesoform cannot be separated into optically active enantiomeric pairs.
This form is a single substance and not a mixture.
When equal amounts of d-tartaric acid and l-tartaric acid are mixed, we
get racemic tartaric acid which is an optically inactive mixture. This can be
separated into two optically active forms.
4. Describe the conformation of cyclohexanol. Comment on their stability.
 A mono substituted cyclohexane like cyclohexanol exists in the two chair

forms. These two forms are interconvertible and exist in equilibrium.
 In one form (I) the –OH group is axially oriented. In the other form (II) the –
OH group is equatorially oriented.
 The energy of the axial conformer is little higher than that of the equatorial
conformer.
 Because the axial substituent experiences steric interaction with the axial H-
atoms present at the third carbon atoms.
 This decreases the stability of the axial conformer.
 This is called 1 : 3-diaxial interaction. This interaction is absent in the
equatorial conformer.
 Hence equatorial cyclohexanol is present to an extent of about 90% in the
equilibrium mixture. The axial isomer is present only to 10%.
ss***{Page 146 of 258}***ss
Energy level diagrsam for axial and equatorial alcohols
5. Illustrate geometrical isomerism with an example.
(or) Write a note on Cis-Trans isomerism.
Geometrical Isomerism:
 Isomerism that arises out of difference in the spatial arrangement of atoms or
groups about the doubly bonded carbon atoms is called Geometrical
isomerism.
 These isomers are not mirror images of each other. Rotation about C=C is not
possible at normal conditions and hence the isomers are isolable.
 If different atoms or groups are bonded to the ‘C=C’ bond in a molecule, more
than one spatial arrangement is possible. For example, 2-butene exists in two
isomeric forms.
 The isomer in which similar groups lie on the same side is called ‘cis
isomer’(I).
 The other in which similar groups lie in opposite direction is called ‘Trans
isomer’ (II).
ss***{Page 147 of 258}***ss

 This isomerism is called ‘Cis-Trans’ isomerism. The two groups attached to
the carbon atoms need not be same, it maybe different also. e.g.,
6. Explain internal and external compensation with suitable example.
1).Internal compensation:
There is another optical isomer for tartaric acid in which one asymmetric
carbon atom is dextrorotatory and the other laevorotatory-both rotating to the
same extent in opposite directions. The net result is, that this isomer becomes
optically inactive and is called the ‘‘Meso’’ isomer.
The optical inactivity of the ‘Meso’ isomer is due to the internal

compensation. It is due to the inherent symmetry in the molecule. Mesoform
cannot be separated into optically active enantiomeric pairs. This form is a single
substance and not a mixture.
2).External compensation:
ss***{Page 148 of 258}***ss

When equal amounts of d-isomer and l-isomer are mixed one gets a ‘‘racemic
mixture’’ and this process is called racemization.
A racemic mixture becomes optically inactive. Because,in this mixture
rotation towards clockwise direction by the dextro isomers is compensated by the
rotation towards the anti-clockwise direction by the laevo isomers.
The optical inactivity of a racemic mixture is said to be due to ‘external
compensation’.
Any how an optically inactive racemic form can be separated into two active
forms. This process of separation is called ‘‘resolution of the racemic mixture’’.
7. Outline the isomerism in 1,3 – butadiene.
1,3 – butadiene:
CH2=CH–CH=CH2 (This molecule can exist in two forms).
CH2= CH CH2= CH
| |
CH = CH2 and CH2= CH
I II
Though these two forms do not differ very much in their energy and stability,
the (I) form, which is similar to ‘trans’ is more stable than (II) form which is similar
to ‘cis’.
These two forms do not arise out of the hindrance to rotation about C=C,
instead the restricted rotation about C–C.
In order to indicate that, this cis-trans isomerism is due to restricted rotation
about C–C bond, they are named as,
S-trans form is also called ‘transoid form’ S-cis form is also called ‘cisoid form’
The energy of S-trans form is 3 Kcals less than the S-cis form. These two forms
differ in chemical reactivity. Very often they give different products in reactions.
8. Write a note on chair and boat form of cyclohexane.
ss***{Page 149 of 258}***ss

Boat conformation
This form has two pairs of carbon atoms with eclipsing bonds. This eclipsing
interaction destabilies boat form. Though the chair form is stable, it is sufficiently
flexible to turn itself upside down called ring flipping so that all bonds which are
axial originally become equatorial and vice versa.
There exists equilibrium between

these two chair forms with boat form as intermediate.
ss***{Page 150 of 258}***ss

(ORGANIC-CHEMISTRY)
16. HYDROXY DERIVATIVES
1. Which has the highest boiling point?
a) CH3CH3 b) CH3OH c) C2H5OH d) C3H8
2. Which is soluble in H2O?
a) Phenol b) Alkanes c) Alcohols d) Alkenes
3. Order of reactivity of alcohol towards sodium metal is
a) Primary< secondary > tertiary
b)Primary> secondary > tertiary
c) Primary< secondary < tertiary
d) Primary> secondary < tertiary
4. The boiling point of ethyl alcohol should be less than that of
a) Propane b) formic acid c) Dimethyl ether d) none of the above
5. Ethyl alcohol cannot be used as a solvent for CH3MgI because
a) CH3MgI reacts with alcohol giving methane
b) The reaction between them is explosive in nature
c) CH3MgI is converted to C2H5MgI
d) Alcohol is immiscible with CH3MgI
6. When alcohols are converted to alkyl chlorides by thionyl chloride in presence of
pyridine the intermediate formed is
a) Sulphonium ion
b) chlorosulphonic acid
c) Alkylchlorosulphite
d) chlorosulphite
7. On oxidation of an alcohol gives an aldehyde having the same number of carbon
atoms as that of alcohol. The alcohol is
a) 10 alcohol b) 20 alcohol c) 30 alcohol d) None
8. A compound that gives a positive iodoform test is
a) 1-pentanol b) 2-pentanone c) 3-pentanone d) pentanal
9. The compound that reacts fastest with Lucas reagent is
a) butan-1-ol b) butan-2-ol
c) 2-methyl propan-1-ol d) 2-methyl propan-2-ol
10. The ionization constant of phenol is higher than that of ethanol because
a) Phenoxide ion is bulkier than ethoxide
b) Phenoxide ion is stronger base than ethoxide
c) Phenoxide ion is stablized through delocalization
d) Phenoxide ion is less stable than ethoxide ion
11. Among the following compounds strongest acid is
a) HC≡CH b) C6H6 c) C2H6 d) CH3OH
ss***{Page 151 of 258}***ss

12.The most unlikely representation of resonance structures of p-nitrophenoxide

ion is
a) b) c) d)
13. p-nitrophenol is having lower pKa value than phenol because

a) Phenol is more acidic than p-nitro phenol
b) Anion of p-nitrophenol is more stabilised by resonance than
that of phenol
c) Degree of ionisation of p-nitro phenol is less than that of phenol
d) Anion of p-nitrophenol is less stable than that of phenol
14. The reaction of Lucas reagent is fast with
a) (CH3)3COH b) (CH3)2CHOH
c) CH3 (CH2)2OH d) CH3CH2OH
15. When phenol is distilled with Zn dust it gives
a) Benzaldehyde b) benzoic acid c) toluene d) benzene
16. A compound that undergoes bromination easily is
a) benzoic acid b) benzene c) phenol d) toluene
17. Isomerism exhibited by ethylene glycol is
a) Position isomerism b) chain isomerism
c) Functional isomerism d) both (a) and (c)
18. Ethylene diamine is converted to ethylene glycol using
a) Na2CO3 solution b) nitrous acid
c) NaHCO3 (aqueous) d) Baeyer’s reagent
19. Ethylene glycol forms Terylene with
a) Adipic acid b) phthalic anhydride
c) Terephthalic acid d) oxalic acid
20. 1-propanol and 2-propanol can be best distinguished by
a) Oxidation with KMnO4 followed by reaction with Fehling solution
b) Oxidation with acidic dichromate followed by reaction with Fehling
solution
c) Oxidation by heating with copper followed by reaction with Fehling
solution
d) Oxidation with concentrated H2SO4 followed by reaction with Fehling
solution
21. Glycerol is used
a) As a sweeteing agent b) In the manufacture of good quality soap
ss***{Page 152 of 258}***ss
c) In the manufacture of nitro glycerin d) In all the above
22. The alcohol obtained by the hydrolysis of oils and fats is
a) Pentanol b) propanol c) glycerol d) glycol
23. The number of secondary alcoholic group in glycerol is
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 0
24. The active component of dynamite is
a) Keiselghur b) Nitro glycerine
c) Nitro benzene d) Trinitro toluene
25. The reaction of ethylene glycol with PI3 gives
a) ICH2CH2I b) CH2 = CH2 c) CH2 = CHI d) ICH = CHI

1. Oxidation of glycerol using bismuth nitrate gives____________
a) Tartaric acid b) mesoxalic acid
c) oxalic acid d) glyceric acid
2. The characteristic odour of lower phenol is_____________
a)carbolic acid b) fruity c) oil of bitter almonds d) rotten fish
3. Which of the following is used in the treatment of asthma and whooping cough?
a)Benzyl benzoate b) phenyl benzoate
c) benzyl acetate d) phenyl acetate

MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What happens when glycerol react KHSO4?(Mar-2007, Mar-2010,June-
2011,Sep-2010) (or) How is acrolein formed? (Jun-2011,Mar-2012)
2. How phenolphthalein is prepared?(Mar-2006, July-2006, June-2009,Mar-

2013)
Phenols are heated with phthalic anhydride and con.H2SO4 to give
Phenolphthalein.
ss***{Page 153 of 258}***ss

3. How ethylene glycol is converted into dioxan?(Mar-2008,Oct-2008,Jun-

2012,Jun-2013)
In this reaction, two molecules of water is removed by Sulphuric acid.
4. How is Dacron prepared? (Mar-2009, June-2010,Mar-2011,Jun-13)
5. Explain the reaction of glycerol with oxalic acid at 533K? (Or)

How allyl alcohol is prepared from glycerol. (Sep-2007, June-2008)
6. Give tests for phenol.(Sep-2007, Mar-2009,and Jun-2011, oct -2014)

 Phenol + Neutral FeCl3 → violet colour.
 Phenol + Br2 / H2O → 2,4,6 – tribromo phenol ( White precipitate).
 Phenol + C6H5N2Cl → p – hydroxyl azo benzene (red orange dye).
7. Explain Dow’s process?(July-2007, Mar-2010,Jun-2013,14)
ss***{Page 154 of 258}***ss

8. How can the consumption of alcohol by a person be detected? (Mar-2006)

The breath analysis test for the detection of ethanol involves the oxidation of
alcohol in the breath of a person who has consumed alcohol, by acidic potassium
dichromate and observing the change in the colour of the chromium ion (CrVI)
from yellow orange to (CrIII) which is blue green colour.
9. How will you prepare ethylene glycol from ethylene?(Oct-2009, Jun - 14)
By the action of cold dilute alkaline KMnO4 solution which is known as
Baeyer’s reagent on ethylene, ethylene glycol is formed.
CH2 = CH2 + H2O + (O) → CH2OH – CH2OH.
10. Why glycol is more viscous than ethanol? (July-2006)

Because of the presence of two hydroxyl groups the intermolecular
hydrogen bonding is made much stronger. Hydrogen bond can be formed
between both OH groups resulting in a polymeric structure.
This leads to high viscosity.
11. Phenol is insoluble in NaHCO3 but acetic acid is soluble-Give the reason.
(Mar-2007)
Phenols are weakly acidic. These are stronger acids than alcohols but
weaker than all mineral acids, carboxylic acids and even carbonic acid. Hence
phenols dissolve in sodium hydroxide (a strong base) but not in sodium bicarbonate
(weaker base).
12. How will you convert ethyl alcohol in to diethyl ether? (July 2007)
13. Alcohols cannot be used as a solvent for Grignard reagents. Why? (Mar-08)
ss***{Page 155 of 258}***ss
Strongly basic substances like organometallic compounds are decomposed
by alcohol.
R–OH + CH3MgBr → RO–Mg–Br + CH4
Hence alcohols cannot be used as a solvent for Grignard’s reagents.
14. How will you convert 2-methyl 2-propanol into 2-methyl propene? (Jun-
2009) (or) How is tertiary butyl alcohol converted to isobutylene.(Mar-
2011, oct -2014)
15. Give a brief account on coupling reaction of phenol with benzene

diazonium chloride.(Sep-2006,Sep-2009,Mar-2012,Jun-2013)
16. How phenol is identified by dye test? Give equation (June-2011,15)
17. How is formic acid obtained from Glycerol.(Oct-2012)
ss***{Page 156 of 258}***ss

18. How is benzyl alcohol prepared from Grignard reagent.(Sep-11, Mar -15)
19. How is nitro glycerine prepared from Glycerol.(Sep-2011,jun-15)
20. Write a note on Kolbe’s reaction.(Jun-2008)
ss***{Page 157 of 258}***ss

21. How is Glycerol synthesized from propylene.(Jun-2008)
22. Give the uses of benzyl alcohol. (Oct-2006)

(i) Used as a local anaesthetic in intravenus subcutaneous injections.
(ii) As esters in perfumery. (Benzyl acetate has fragrance of Jasmine)
(iii) As benzyl benzoate in the treatment of asthma and whooping cough.
23. Starting from phenol how would you obtain picric acid? (Sep-10, Mar-14)
24. How are 1-propanol and 2-propanal distinguished by oxidation method.

(Jun-2012) Oxidation in the presence of H+/ K2Cr2O7 :
(O)
(1). CH3CH2CH2OH + (O) → CH3CH2CHO → CH3CH2COOH
(1-propanol) propanaldehyde propanoic acid
(O)
(2). (CH3)2CHOH + (O) → CH3COCH3 → CH3COOH
(2-propanol) (Acetone) (Acetic Acid) with
lesser carbon atom.
25. Give a chemical test to distinguish between ethanol and methanol (Oct-08)
 Ethanol when treated with con.H2SO4 at 440K, intra molecular dehydration
takes place and product formed is ethylene.
 Methanol does not react with con.H2SO4.
ss***{Page 158 of 258}***ss
26. Phenol is soluble in alcohol why? (June-2010)

 Because, phenols are easily form Intermolecular H – bonding with alcohols.
17. ETHER

1. The isomerism exhibited by C2H5OC2H5 and CH3 – O – CH – CH3 is
|
CH3
a) Functional b) metamerism c) position d) chain
2. Which one of the following is simple ether?
a) CH3 – O – C2H5 b) C2H5 – O – CH3
c) C2H5 – O – C2H5 d) C3H7 – O – C2H7
3. Diethyl ether can be decomposed with
a) HI b) KMnO4 c) NaOH d) H2O
ss***{Page 159 of 258}***ss
4. Oxygen atom of ether is
a) Very active b) Replaceable
c) Oxidizing d) comparatively inert
5. According to Lewis concept of acids and bases, ethers are
a) Neutral b) Acidic c) Basic d) Amphoteric
6. Intermolecular hydrogen bonds are not present in
a) CH3COOH b) C2H5OC2H5 c) CH3CH2OH d) C2H5NH2
7. When ethyl Iodide is treated with dry silver oxide it forms
a) Ethyl alcohol b) diethylether
c) Silverethoxide d) ethylmethyl ether
8. Williamson's synthesis is an example of
a) Nucleophilic addition b) electrophilic addition
c) Electrophilic substitution d) Nucleophilic substitution reaction
9. When ether is exposed to air for some time an explosive substance produced
a) Peroxide b) oxide c) TNT d) superoxide
10. Ether is formed when alkylhalide is treated with sodium alkoxide. This method
is known as
a) Hoffmann reaction b) Williamson's synthesis
c) Wurtz synthesis d) Kolbe's reaction

1. Which one of the following is unsymmetrical ether?
a)CH3-O-C2H5 b) CH3-O-CH3 c) C2H5-O-C2H5 d) C6H5OC6H5
2. Which one of the following forms ether when heated with con. H2SO4 at 413K.
a) Organic acid b) aldehyde c) alcohol d) ketone
3. Higher ethers can be prepared from low members by the action of____
a) Con.H2SO4 b) AgOH c) Sodium alk oxide d) Grignard reagent
4. Ethers should never be evaporated to dryness because_____________
a)They form explosive peroxide b) they are volatile
c) they are inert d) they are lighter than water
5. Which one of the following ethers is used in perfumery?
a) Dimethyl ether b) diethyl ether
c) ethyl methyl ether d) methyl phenyl ether
6. Anisole an bromination gives ___________
a)O and P-Bromo anisole b) m-Bromo anisole
c) P-Bromoanisol only d) 2,4,6-tribromo anisol
7. The IUPAC name of phenetole is ____________
a) Phenoxy ethane b) ethoxy benzene c) ethyl phenyl ether d) benzoxy ethane
8. The compound mixed with ethanol to serve as substitute for petrol is___
ss***{Page 160 of 258}***ss

a) Methoxy methane b) Ethoxy ethane c) methanol d) ethanol
9. When ethers are exposed to air for a long time, they form___________
a) Peroxides b) halides c) oxides d) super oxider
10. The isomerism exhibited by 1 propanol and methoxy ethane is________
a) Chain b) position c) functional d) metamerism
11. Diethyl ether behaves as a ___________
a) Lewis acid b) Lewis base c) Neutral compound d) Bronsted acid
12. The zeisel’s methods of detection and estimation of alkoxy group in alkaloids
involves the reaction of ether with__________
a) HI b) Cl2 c) PCl5 d) AlCl3
13. The number of ether isomers possible for C4H10O is_________
a) 7 b) 5 c) 4 d) 3
14. In the formation of oxonium salt when ethereal oxygen reacts with strong
oxygen reacts with strong mineral acid is called_____________
a) Electronation b) Protonation c) deprotonation d) dehydration
15. How many alcohol isomers are possible for the formula C4H10O?
a) 4 b) 2 c) 3 d) 7
16. The solvent used for the Grignard reagent is__________
a) Ethyl alcohol b) diethyl ether c) acetone d) benzene
17. When di ethyl ether react with chlorine in the presence of sun light is ____
a) α-chloro diethyl ether b) α,α’-dichloro diethyl ether
c) Perchloro diethyl ether d) both (a) & (b)
18. IUPAC name of CH3-O-CH-CH3
|
CH3
a) 1-Methoxy propane b) Methyl isopropyl ether
c) Isopropyl methyl ether d) 2-Methoxy propane
19. Which one of the following does not form peroxide easily
a) Diethyl ether b) Ethylmethyl ether c) Dimethyl ether d) Anisole
1. Give any three methods of preparing diethyl ether.
1. Intermolecular dehydration of alcohol:

413K
C2H5OH +HOC2H5 → C2H5 – O – C2H5 + H2O
Conc.H2SO4
2. Williamson’s synthesis: ∆
ss***{Page 161 of 258}***ss
C2H5 Br + NaOC2H5 → C2H5 – O – C2H5 + NaBr
3. From alkyl halides:

∆
C2H5 – I + Ag-O-Ag + I– C2H5 → C2H5 – O – C2H5 + 2AgI
2. Give any three methods of preparing anisole.
1. Williamsons synthesis : ∆
C6H5─O─Na + I─CH3 → C6H5OCH3 +NaI
2. Using diazomethane :
C6H5OH + CH2N2 → C6H5OCH3 + N2
3. Manufacture of ether : NaOH

C6H5OH + (CH3)2SO4 → C6H5OCH3 +CH3 .HSO4
3. Distinguish between Aromatic Ether (Anisole) and Aliphatic Ether (Diethyl

Ether).
S.No Aromatic Ether (Anisole) Aliphatic Ether (Diethyl Ether)

1. High boiling liquid. Volatile liquid
2. Used in perfumery Used as anesthetic
3. Not used as solvent. Used as a solvent
4. Cannot be used a substitute for Mixed with alcohol, used as a
petrol substitute for petrol
5. Does not form peroxide easily Forms peroxide in air.
4. How does diethyl ether react with (a) O2/long contact (b) HI in excess
(c) PCl5 (d) dil.H2SO4 .
(a). withO2 /long contact:

(O)
C2H5 – O – C2H5 → (C2H5)2O2
Diethyl peroxide
(b). with HI in excess:
ss***{Page 162 of 258}***ss
2HI
C2H5 – O – C2H5 → C2H5I + C2H5I + H2O
(c). with PCl5:
C2H5–O–C2H5 + PCl5 → 2C2H5Cl + POCl3
(d). with dil.H2SO4:

Dil.H2SO4
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + H – O – H → 2C2H5OH
5. How does diethyl ether react with a) HI b)con. H2 SO4 c)BF3

d) Cl2 in light.
(a). with HI:

HI
C2H5 – O – C2H5 → C2H5OH + C2H5I
(b).with con. H2 SO4:
H
|
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + H2SO4 → (C2H5 – O – C2H5) HSO4¯
+
diethyloxonium hydrogen sulphate

(C).with BF3 :
C2H5
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + BF3 → O : → BF3
(diethyl ether) C2H5
(d).with Cl2 in light.
light
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + 10Cl2 → C2Cl5 – O – C2Cl5
(Perchloro diethyl ether)
6. Write the all possible isomers for C4H10O molecular formula.

1. Functional isomerism: Ethers are functional isomers of alcohols as
both have the same general formula CnH2n+2O.
ss***{Page 163 of 258}***ss

2. Metamerism: Molecules have same formula, same functional group,

differing only in the nature of the alkyl group attached to oxygen.
ss***{Page 164 of 258}***ss

18. CARBONYL COMPOUNDS

1. The chain isomer of 2-methyl propanal is
a) 2-butanone b) butanal
c) 2-methyl propanol d) but-3-ene-2-ol
2. Schiffs reagent gives pink colour with
a) Acetone b) acetaldehyde c) ethyl alcohol d) methylacetate
3. Isopropyl alcohol vapours with air over silver catalyst at 520 K give
a) Tert.butyl alcohol b) acetaldehyde c) Acetone d) 2-propanol
4. Methyl ketones are usually characterized by
a) The Fehling’s solution b) the iodoform test
c) The Schiff’s test d) the Tollen’s reagent
5. Which of the following compounds is oxidised to give ethyl methyl ketone?
a) 2-propanol b) 2-pentanone c) 1-butanol d) 2-butanol
6. Formaldehyde polymerizes to give
a) Paraldehyde b) paraformaldehyde c) formalin d) formic acid
7. Tollen’s reagent is
a) Ammoniacal cuprous chloride b) ammoniacal cuprous oxide
c) Ammoniacal silver nitrate d) ammoniacal silver chloride
8. When acetaldehyde is heated with Fehling solution, it gives a precipitate of
a) Cu2O b) CuO c) CuO + Cu2O d) Cu
9. The compound that does not undergo Cannizzaro reaction is
a) Formaldehyde b) acetaldehyde
c) Benzaldehyde d) trimethyl acetaldehyde
10. The formation of cyanohydrin from a ketone is an example of
a) Electrophilic addition b) nucleophilic addition
c) Nucleophilic substitution d) electrophilic substitution
11. Hydrogenation of benzoyl chloride in the presence of Pd on BaSO4 gives
a) Phenol b) benzoic acid
c) benzyl alcohol d) benzaldehyde
12. From which of the following, tertiary butyl alcohol is obtained by the action of
methyl magnesium iodide?
a) HCHO b) CH3CHO c) CH3COCH3 d) CO2
13. During reduction of aldehydes with hydrazine and C2H5ONa the product formed
is
a) R–CH = N–NH2 b) R–C≡N c) R – C – NH2 d) R–CH3
14. Aldol is
a) 2-hydroxy butanol b) 3-hydroxy butanol
c) 3-hydroxy butanal d) 2-hydroxy butanal
ss***{Page 165 of 258}***ss
15. In the reduction of acetaldehyde using LiAlH4 the hydride ion acts as
a) Electrophile b) nucleophile c) both (a) and (b) d) a free radical
16. Which of the following statement is wrong?

a) 2-pentanone and 3-pentanone are position isomers
b) Aqueous solution of formaldehyde is known as formalin
c) Aldehydes and ketones undergo nucleophilic substitution
d) Aldehydes act as reducing agents
17. A cyanohydrin of a compound X on hydrolysis gives lactic acid. The X is
a) HCHO b) CH3CHO c) (CH3)2CO d) C6H5CH2CHO
18. The IUPAC name of CH3 – C = CH – C – CH3 is
| ║
CH3 O
a) 4-methyl pent-3-en-2-one b) 2-methylpent-3-en-2-one
c) 3-methyl pent-2-en-1-one d) None of these
19. Which of the following does not give iodoformtest?
a) Acetophenone b) benzophenone
c) CH3 – CH–OH d) CH3 – CH – CH2–CH2 – CH3
| |
CH3 OH
20. The compound which does not reduce Fehling solution is
a) Formaldehyde b) acetaldehyde
c) benzaldehyde d) propionaldehyde
Conc.H2SO4
21. CH3COCH3 –——› The product is,
a) Mesitylene b) mesityl oxide c) phorone d) paraldehyde
22. Which compound on strong oxidation gives propionic acid?
a) CH3– CH – CH3 b) CH3 – CO – CH3
|
OH
c) CH3 d) CH3CH2CH2OH
|
CH3 – C – OH
|
CH3
23. The compound used in the preparation of the tranquilizer, sulphonal is
a) Acetone b) acetophenone c) isopropyl alcohol d) glycol
24. Calcium acetate + calcium benzoate gives
a) Benzophenone b) benzaldehyde
c) Acetophenone d) phenyl benzoate
25. Bakelite is a product of reaction between
a) Formaldehyde and NaOH b) phenol and methanal
ss***{Page 166 of 258}***ss
c) Aniline and NaOH d) phenol and chloroform

1. The compound that does not answer iodo form test is ____________.
a) Acetophenone b) isopropyl alcohol
c) pentanol d) benzophenone
2. The compound used in the preparation of triphenyl methane dye is___
a) Methanol b) phenyl methanal
c) phenyl methanol d) ethanol
3. Propanone is usually characterized by_________
a) Fehling’s solution b) iodo form test
c) sechiffs test d) Tollen’s reagent
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What is Urotropine? Give its use (Oct-2006, Mar-2008, June-2009, Oct-2009,
Mar-2010,Sep-2010,June 2011,Sep-2011, Jun-2012,Mar-2014, oct - 14)
(OR) How does formaldehyde react with ammonia? (July-2006)
2. What is Rosenumund’s reduction? (Sep-2007,15)

Rosenumund’s reduction:
ss***{Page 167 of 258}***ss

This is called Rosenmund’s reduction. BaSO4 is used as a catalytic poison, to

stop the reduction at the stage of aldehyde. Otherwise, the aldehyde formed will
be further reduced to primary alcohol.
3. Give the IUPAC name for the following. (a) crotanaldehyde (b) methyl n-
propyl ketone (c) phenyl acetaldehyde.(Mar-2006,Mar-2013)
(a)2- Butenal (b) 2- pentanone (c) Phenyl ethanal.
4. Give the tests for aldehydes (June-2008,Mar-2012,Jun-2013)

 They reduce ammonical silver nitrate (Tollen’s reagent) to metallic silver.
 Reduce Fehling’s solution (copper sulphate, sodium potassium tartrate) to red

cuprous oxide.
 Aliphatic aldehydes restore the original colour (red-pink) of the Schiff's

reagent. (when SO2 is passed through intensely pink coloured Schiff’s reagent
in water. It forms a colourless solution. This colourless solution is used for
this test). This is characteristic test for aldehydes.
5. What is Formalin? Give its use. (July-2007, Jun - 2014)

40% aqueous solution of formaldehyde is known as formalin.
USES: preservative for biological specimens and in leather tanning.
6. How does acetone react with CHCl3 in the presence of KOH? (Jun-2013)
ss***{Page 168 of 258}***ss

7. Write briefly on Clemmensen’s reduction.(Jun-2010)

Clemmensen’s reduction:
8. What happens when benzaldehyde heated with NaOH.(Oct-2012)
9. Explain the halo form reaction? (Oct-2008)
10. How is acetophenone prepared by Friedel -Craft’s reaction?(Mar-07,09,11)
Friedel -Craft’s reaction:
ss***{Page 169 of 258}***ss


MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Explain the mechanism of Aldol condensation for Aldehyde.
Aldol condensation for Aldehyde:
OH¯
CH3CHO + CH3CHO → CH3CH (OH) CH2CHO + H2O
Acetaldehyde Acetaldehyde 3 – hydroxyl butanal
ss***{Page 170 of 258}***ss

2. Explain the mechanism of Aldol condensation for Acetone.

Aldol condensation for Acetone:
OH¯
CH3COCH3 + CH3COCH3 → CH3 C (OH)CH3 + H2O
Acetone Acetone |
CH2COCH3
( 4 – hydroxyl 4 – methyl 2 – Pentanone )
Mechanism:
STEP:1 (The carbanion is formed as the α-hydrogen atom is removed as

a Proton by the base).
ss***{Page 171 of 258}***ss

STEP:2
STEP:3
3. Explain the mechanism of Crossed Aldol condensation.

Mechanism of Crossed Aldol condensation:
When an aldehyde and a ketone react in the same way it is called
‘Crossed Aldol condensation’. OH¯
CH3CHO + CH3COCH3 → CH3CH (OH)CH2COCH3 + H2O
Acetaldehyde Acetone 4 – Hydroxy 2 – Pentanone
Mechanism:
STEP:1 (The carbanion is formed as the α-hydrogen atom is removed as a
Proton by the base).
STEP:2
ss***{Page 172 of 258}***ss

STEP:3
4. Explain the mechanism of Cannizaro reaction.

Cannizaro reaction:
Benzaldehyde undergoes Cannizaro reaction because of the absence
α-hydrogen. It involves self-oxidation and reduction of
benzaldehyde when heated with concentrated NaOH.
NaOH
C6H5CHO + C6H5CHO C6H5COONa + C6H5CH2OH
Benzaldehyde Benzaldehyde Sodium benzoate Benzyl
alcohol
Mechanism of Cannizaro reaction:
ss***{Page 173 of 258}***ss

5. Explain the mechanism of Claisen or Claisen Schmidt reaction.

Claisen or Claisen Schmidt reaction:
It reacts with aliphatic aldehydes or ketones in presence of
NaOH forming unsaturated aldehyde or ketone.
OH¯
CH3CHO + C6H5CHO → C6H5─CH
Acetaldehyde Benzaldehyde ║ + H2O
CHCHO
Cinnamaldehyde
Mechanism:
STEP:1
STEP:2
STEP:3
ss***{Page 174 of 258}***ss

19. CARBOXYLIC ACIDS

1. Which of the following is least acidic?
a) C2H5OH b) CH3COOH c) C6H5OH d) ClCH2COOH
2. Weakest acid among the following is
a) Acetic acid b) Phenol c) Water d) Acetylene
3. Ester formation involves the reaction of
a) An aldehyde and a ketone b) An alcohol with RMgX
c) Two molecules of an acid with dehydrating agent
d) An acylhalide with an alcohol
4. Heating a mixture of sodium acetate and soda lime gives
a) Methane b) ethane c) aceticacid d) benzene
5. The acid which reduces Tollen's reagent is
a) Acetic acid b) benzoic acid c) formicacid d) oxalic acid
CH3
|
6. The IUPAC name of CH3– CH2–CH–COOH is
a) α-methyl butric acid b) 3-methyl butanoic acid
c) 2-methyl butanoic acid d) Isopentanoic acid
7. The Isomerism exhibited by CH3CH2COOH and CH3COOCH3 is
a) Metamerism b) position c) chain d) functional
8. The acid that cannot be prepared by Grignard reagent
a) Acetic acid b) formic acid c) butyric acid d) benzoic acid
9. Which order of arrangement is correct interms of the strength of the acid
a) CH3–CH2 COOH > CH3COOH < HCOOH < ClCH2COOH
b) ClCH2COOH <HCOOH < CH3COOH < CH3CH2COOH
c) CH3–CH2COOH < CH3 COOH < HCOOH < ClCH2COOH
d) HCOOH > CH3CH2COOH < CH3COOH > ClCH2COOH
10. The compound which undergoes intramolecular dehydration with P2O5is
a) Acetic acid b) formic acid c) propionic acid d) Butyric acid
H 160 C0
11. C = O ——› ? The product is

HO
a) CO + H2O b) HCOOH c) H2 + CO2 d) HCHO + O2
12. When chlorine is passed through acetic acid in presence of red P, it forms.
a) Acetyl chloride b) Trichloro acetaldehyde
ss***{Page 175 of 258}***ss
c) Trichloro acetic acid d) Methyl chloride
13. Which of the following compounds will react with NaHCO3 solution to give
sodium salt and CO2?
a) Acetic acid b) n-hexanol c) phenol d) both (a) and (c)
14. When propanoic acid is treated with aqueous sodium - bicarbonatate, CO2 is
liberated. The "C" of CO2 comes from
a) Methyl group b) carboxylic acid group
c) Methylene group d) bicarbonate
15. Carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenol and alcohol because of
a) Inter molecular hydrogen bonding
b) Formation of dimers
c) Highly acidic hydrogen
d) Greater resonance stabilisation of their conjugate base
16. Among the following the strongest acid is
a) ClCH2COOH b) Cl3CCOOH c) CH3COOH d) Cl2CHCOOH
17. Which of the following compound is optically active?
a) CH3CH2COOH b) HOOC–CH2–COOH
c) CH3CH (OH) COOH d) Cl2CHCOOH
18. CH3CH (OH) COOH --------------- ? The product is
H2O2/Fe2+
a) CH3COCOOH b) CH3CH2COOH c) CH3CH (OH) CHO d) COOHCH2COOH
19. The compound found in some stony deposit in kidneys is

a) Potassium oxalate b) oxalic acid
c) Potassium succinate d) calcium oxalate
20. Ethylene cyanide on hydrolysis using acid gives
a) oxalic acid b) succinic acid c) Adipic acid d) propionic acid
1. Concentrates solution of sodium acetate on electrolysis given__________
a)Ethane b) propane c) methane d) butane
2. Among the following strongest acid is
a) CH3COOH b) HCOOH c) ClCH2COOH d) CH3CH2COOH
3. Aspirin is,
a) Salicylic acid b) Acetyl Salicylic acid
b) Salicylaldehyde c) Methyl Salicylate
4. The order of reactivity of carboxylic acid derivatives is
a) Acid chloride > Ester > Amide > Acid anhydride
b) Acid chloride > Acid anhydride >Ester > Amide
c) Acid chloride > Amide > Acid anhydride >Ester
d) Acid anhydride > Ester > Amide > Acid chloride
ss***{Page 176 of 258}***ss

II. Three Mark Querstion & Answers: { Q.No. 49 }

1. HVZ – reaction.(Sep-2006,oct -2014)
Hell- Volhard Zelinsky:
2. What is trans esterification.(Mar-2006,Mar2014)

Trans esterification:
3. Mention the uses of Oxalic acid. (Mar-2006, Mar-2009, Jun-2011, Sep-2011)

Uses :
1. for removing ink stains and iron stains.
2. as mordant in dyeing and calico printing.
3. in manufacture of ink and metal polishes.
4. Redox titration.
4. Formic acid reduce Tollen’s reagent but acetic acid does not – why? (Sep-
2007, Sep-2009, Sep-2010, Jun-2012)
Formic acid is unique because it contains both an aldehyde group and
carboxyl group also. Hence it can act as a reducing agent. It reduces Fehling’s
solution, Tollens reagent and decolourises pink coloured KMnO4 solution.
But, Acetic acid does not contain aldehyde group.
5. What is the reaction of lactic acid with dil.H2SO4.(Mar-2008)
6. How is methyl salicylate prepared.(Jun-2008)

ss***{Page 177 of 258}***ss
7. Account for reducing nature of formic acid with suitable illustration.

(Sep-2008)
Formic acid is unique because it contains both an aldehyde group and
carboxyl group also. Hence it can act as a reducing agent. It reduces Fehling’s
solution, Tollens reagent and decolourises pink coloured KMnO4 solution.
8. Write two tests to identify carboxylic acid.(Jun-09,Oct-12, Mar-13,jun-15)

Tests for carboxylic acid
1. Aqueous solution of carboxylic acids turn blue litmus into red colour.
2. Carboxylic acids give brisk effervescence with sodium bi-carbonate due to
the evolution of carbon-di-oxide.
3. On warming carboxylic acids with alcohol and concentrated sulphuric acid
it forms ester which is identified from its fruity odour.
9. Give tests for salicylic acid.(Mar-2010)

Test for salicylic acid:
1. An aqueous solution of salicylic acid gives violet colour with neutral ferric
chloride.
2. It gives effervescence with the sodium bicarbonate.
3. It is soluble in sodium hydroxide and re precipitated on acidification.
4. With Bromine water the colour is discharged with the formation of white
precipitate.
ss***{Page 178 of 258}***ss

10. Mention the uses of benzoic acid.(Jun-2010)
Uses of benzoic acid:
1. Benzoic acid is used as an urinary antiseptic
2. Sodium benzoate is used as food preservative
3. Benzoic acid vapours are used to disinfect bronchial tube.
4. It is used for the manufacture of dyes.
11. What is aspirin? How is it prepared.(Mar-2011)
12. What happens when lactic acid is treated with PCl5? Write the
equation.(Mar 12, 15 (only structure of lactyl chloride)
13. Write any three uses of lactic acid.(Jun-2013)

Uses of lactic acid :
1. In tanning industry.
2. In soft drinks.
3. In the treatment of digestive disorder in children.
4. Preparation of lactates, ethyl lactate as a solvent.
5. Silver lactate as an antiseptic and astringent.
14. Compare the strength of mono, di and trichloro acetic acid. (Oct-2013)
When chloroacetic acid is taken, the (–I) effect of chlorine increases its
strength.
ss***{Page 179 of 258}***ss

Note: Refer some five mark questions. And IUPAC names for some
compounds.
IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 62 & 68 (b) }
1. Write a note on Kolbe’s electrolytic reaction.
Kolbe’s electrolytic reaction: Electrolysis of concentrated aqueoussolution

of sodium salt of acids gives hydrocarbon.
2. How is Oxalic acid prepared from sodium formate.
ss***{Page 180 of 258}***ss

3. How is Lactic acid manufactured? (or) How is Lactic acid prepared from
Cane sugar?
Fermentation of dilute solution of cane sugar by BAL gives Lactic acid. ( 40-
45 c for six hours)
0
Acid is removed by the addition of CaCO3 which precipitates calcium

lactate. It is filtered and decomposed with dilute sulphuric acid. The filtrate is
distilled under reduced pressure.
4. How will you synthesis Lactic acid from acetylene.
5. How will you prepared Lactic acid from Propene and α – bromo propionic
acid
ss***{Page 181 of 258}***ss

(1) From Propene:
(2) From α – bromo propionic acid.
6. How does Lactic acid react with following?

1) Fenton’s reagent. 2) Acidified KMnO4 3) PCl5
4) dil.H2SO4.
(1) Fenton’s reagent:
(2) Acidified KMnO4
(3) PCl5
(4) dil.H2SO4 :
7. How is Lactic acid react with Conc.H2SO4? Write Haloform reaction of Lactic
acid.
(1) Lactic acid with Conc.H2SO4 (Formation of cyclic ester (mar -15):
ss***{Page 182 of 258}***ss

(2) Haloform reaction of Lactic acid:
8. How will you prepare Aspirin, Methyl salicylate and 2,4,6 – tri bromo
phenol from salicylic acid.
(1) Aspirin from salicylic acid.(Used as analgesic & antipyretic)
(2) Methyl salicylate from salicylic acid.
(3) 2,4,6 – tri bromo phenol from salicylic acid.
ss***{Page 183 of 258}***ss

(It is white colour precipitate and used as identification test for Salicylic acid)
9. Write any three methods of preparation of Benzoic acid.

(1) Oxidation of Toluene:
(2) Hydrolysis of Phenyl cyanide:
(3) Carbonation of Grignard reagent followed by Hydrolysis:
10. Distinguish Formic acid and Acetic acid.
S.No. Formic acid Acetic acid

1. Reduce Tollen’s reagent Does not reduce Tollen’s reagent
2. Reduce Fehling’s solution Does not reduce Fehling’s solution
3. Does not undergo inter It undergo inter molecular
molecular dehydration dehydration
4. It contains –CHO & -COOH It contains –COOH group only.
groups.
5. Does not undergoes de- It undergo de-carboxylation reaction
carboxylation reaction and gives methane.
ss***{Page 184 of 258}***ss
11. What happens when Benzoic acid react with the following.
(1) Conc. HNO3/ H2SO4 (2) Cl2 / FeCl3 (3) PCl5
(1) Conc. HNO3 / H2SO4 (2) Cl2 / FeCl3
(3) PCl5
12. What is the action of heat on Formic acid, Oxalic acid, Succinic acid?
(1) Action of heat on Formic acid:
(2) Action of heat on Oxalic acid:
(3) action of heat on Succinic acid:
13. Write correct equation for Oxalic acid with Ammonia (NH3) & Succinic acid
with PCl5 .
(1) Oxalic acid with Ammonia (NH3)
(2) Succinic acid with PCl5
ss***{Page 185 of 258}***ss

Note : Refer 3-mark questions and Mechanisms.

MECHANISM:
1. Explain the mechanism of Esterification reaction.
Esterification reaction.
H+
CH3COOH + C2H5OH → CH3COOC2H5 + H2O
Acetic acid Ethanol Ethyl acetate
Mechanism
Step: 1. Protonation of carboxylic acid
Step: 2. Attack by nucleophile.
2. Explain the mechanism of Kolbe’s reaction.
Kolbe’s reaction:
ss***{Page 186 of 258}***ss

Mechanism:
This reaction is called ‘Kolbe’s reaction’. The sodium salt on

treatment with dilute hydrochloric acid gives salicylic acid.
3. Explain the mechanism of Bromination of Salicylic acid.
Mechanism of Bromination of Salicylic acid:
ss***{Page 187 of 258}***ss

2,4,6-Tri Bromo Phenol

(White precipitate)
20. ORGANIC NITROGEN COMPOUNDS

1. Bromo ethane reacts with silver nitrite to give
a) C2H5NO2 b) C2H5–O–NO c) C2H5Ag + NaBr d) C2H5NC
2. The isomerism exhibited by CH3-CH2-NO2 and CH3CH2– O–N=O is
a) Position b) chain c) functional d) tautomerism
3. In nitro alkanes –NO2 group is converted to –NH2 group by the reaction with
a) Sn/HCl b) Zn dust c) Zn/NH4Cl d) Zn/NaOH
4. When nitromethane is reduced with Zn dust + NH4Cl in neutral medium, we get
a) CH3NH2 b) C2H5NH2 c) CH3NHOH d) C2H5COOH
5. The compound that is most reactive towards electrophilic nitration is
a) Toluene b) benzene c) benzoic acid d) nitrobenzene
6. Nitromethane condenses with acetaldehyde to give
a) Nitro propane b) 1-nitro-2-propanol
c) 2-nitro-1-propanol d) 3-nitro propanol
7. Which of the following compounds has the smell of bitter almonds?
a) Aniline b) nitro methane
c) Benzenesulphonic acid d) nitrobenzene
8. Nitration of nitrobenzene results in
a) o-dinitro benzene b) 1, 3, 5-trinitro benzene
c) p-dinitro benzene d) m-dinitro benzene
ss***{Page 188 of 258}***ss

9. Nitrobenzene on electrolytic reduction in con. Sulphuric acid, the intermediate
formed is
a) C6H5NH – NHC6H5 b) C6H5 – NHOH
c) C6H5 – N = N – C6H5 d) C6H5.HSO4
10. Electrophile used in the nitration of benzene is
a) Hydronium ion b) sulphonic acid
c) Nitronium ion d) bromide ion
11.The reduction of CH3–CH2–C≡N with sodium and alcohol results in the formation
of
a) CH3-CH-CH3 b) CH3–CH2–CH2–OH + N2
|
NH2
c) CH3–CH2–CH2–NH2 d) CH3– CH2– NH2
12. The basic character of amines is due to the
a) Tetrahedral structure b) Presence of nitrogen atom
c) Lone pair of electrons on nitrogen atom
d) High electronegativity of nitrogen
13. The organic compound that undergoes carbylamine reaction is
a) (C2H5)2NH b) C2H5NH2 c) (C2H5)3N d) (C2H5)4 N+ I-
14. Primary amine acts as
a) Electrophile b) Lewis base c) Lewis acid d) Free radical
15. Oxidation of aniline with acidified potassium dichromate gives
a) p-benzoquinone b) benzoic acid c) Benzaldehyde d) benzyl alcohol
16. Which one of the following is a secondary amine?
a) Aniline b) diphenylamine
c) sec.butylamine d) tert.butylamine
NaNO2/HCl
17. C6H5NH2 ----------› X. Identify X.
a) C6H5Cl b) C6H5NHOH c) C6H5N2Cl d) C6 H5OH
18. Which of the following will not undergo diazotization?
a) m-toluidine b) aniline c) p-amino phenol d) benzyl amine
19. Aniline differs from ethylamine by the reaction with
a) Metallic sodium b) an alkyl halide
c) Chloroform and caustic potash d) nitrous acid
20. When aqueous solution of benzene diazonium chloride is boiled the product
formed is
a) Benzyl alcohol b) benzene + N2 c) Phenol d) phenyl hydroxylamine

1. Oil of mirbane is_____________
a) Methyl nitrite b) P-dinitro benzene
c) m-nitro toluene d) nitro benzene
ss***{Page 189 of 258}***ss
2. Which among the following is a tertiary amine?
CH3
|
a) (CH3)3C-NH2 b) CH3 – CH – NH – CH3
CH3
|
c) (CH3)3NC2H5 d) CH3 – CH2– C – C2H5
|
NH2
3. Which of the following compounds is called “oil of mirbane”?
a)C6H5NO2 b) C2H5NO2 c) C6H5NH2 d) C6H5NO
4. Which one of the following is a secondary amine?
a) Aniline b) diphenyl amine
c) sec-butyl amine d) tert- butyl amine
5. Which of the following nitro compounds behave as an acid in the presence of
strong alkali?
a) Primary only b) secondary only
c) tertiary only d) both (a)and(b)
6. Conversion of benzene diazonium chloride to chlorobenzene is called___
a)Sandmeyer’s reaction b) stephen’s reaction
c) Gomberg reaction d) schotten-Baumann reaction
7. The compound that does not show tautomerism is__________________
a)Nitro benzene b) nitro methane c) nitro ethane d) 2-nitro propane
8. The nitrogen compound used in the preparation of sulpha drugs in___
a)Methylamine b) nitro methane c) amino benzene d) nitrobenzene
9. The nitro group can be reduced to primary amino group by_____________
a)Sn/Con.HCl b) Zndust c) Zn/NH4Cl d) Zn/NaOH
10. Aniline differs from ethylamine in its reaction with_______________
a) CH3I b) CHCl3 and caustic KOH c) HNO2 d) CH3COCl
11. Nitro-acinitrotautomerism is exhibited by_______________.
a)Nitro methane b) nitro benzene c) chloropicrin d) O-toluidine.
12. CCl3NO2 is used as_____________
a)Soil sterilizing b) organic synthesis c) good solvent d) antioxidant
13. The reaction between benzene diazonium chloride and benzene in the presence
of NaOH is___
a) Perkin’s reaction b) Gatterman’s reaction
ss***{Page 190 of 258}***ss
c) sandmeyer reaction d) Gomberg- Bachmann reaction.
14. Use of chloropicrin is as _____________.
a) Explosive b) Dye c) Anaesthetic d) Sterilizing agent
15. Which of the following will not undergo Hofmann’s bromamide reaction?
a) Ethanamide b) propanamide c) methanamide d) phenyl methanamid
16. The tertiary nitro compound is _____________.
a) 2-nitro propane b) 1-nitropropane
c) 1-nitro-2,2-dimethyl propane d) 2-nitro-2-methyl propane
17. The intermediate formed in the nitration of benzene is___________.
a)Arenium b) Carbanion c) oxonium d) Nitrite ion
18. C2H5N2Cl X; the compound X is___________
a) C6H5NH2 b) C6H5NHNH2 c) C6H5-C6H5 d) C6H5Cl
19. Aniline reacts with benzoyl chloride in the presence of sodium hydroxide and
gives benzanilide. This reaction is known as___________
a) Gattermann reaction b) sandmeyer’sreactio
c) schotten-Baumann reaction d) Gomberg- Bachmann reaction
20. The isomerism exhibited by and is ___________
a) Position b) chain c) functional d) tautomerism
21. The product obtained when nitrobenzene is treated with Zn/NaOH is_____
a) Aniline b) azoxy benzene c) azobenze d) hydrazo benzene
22. C6H5N2Cl X + N2 + HCl. The compound X- is______________
a) C6H5Cl b) C6H5NHNH2 c) C6H6 d) C6H5NO2
23. Which one of the following is most basic
a) Ammonia b) Methylamine c) Dimethylamine d) Aniline
24. Chloropicrin is
a) CCl3CHO b) CCl3NO2 c) CHCl3 d) CH3NO2
25. Methyl isocyanide on reduction using LiAlH4 gives
a) Methyl amine b) Ethyl amine c) Di methyl amine d) Tri methyl amine
26. The reagent that cannot be used for the conversion of C6H5NO2 → C6H5NH2
a) Sn/HCl b) LiAlH4 c) H2 /Ni d) Zn /NaOH
27. The reaction between a primary amine, chloroform & alcoholic KOH is know as
a) Gabriel reaction b) Mustard oil reaction
c) Carbyl amine reaction d) Hoffmann reaction
28. CH3— C — NH2 + 4 (H) Na
║ Ethanol X. The compound X is
O
ss***{Page 191 of 258}***ss
a) Methylamine b) Ethylamine
b) Dimethyl amine d) Nitro-methane
29. Which of the following does not react with Benzene diazonium chloride
a) phenol b) Benzene c) Aniline d) Benzaldehyde
II. Three Mark Question & Answers: { Q. No. 50 }
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. Hoffmann’s hypobromite (or) bromamide reaction.
2. Carbylamines reaction.
3. Mustard oil reaction.
4. Gabrial phthaimide synthesis.
5. Formation of Schiff’s base.
ss***{Page 192 of 258}***ss

6. Diazotization. (Mar-2014)
A cold solution of sodium nitrite reacts with aniline dissolved in hydrochloric
acid, a clear solution is obtained. This solution contains ‘benzene diazonium
chloride’. This reaction is known as ‘diazotisation’.
7. Gattermann’s reaction.
(OR)
8. Sand Meyer’s reaction.
(OR)
9. Gomberg’s reaction.
NOTE: Prepare the Previous Public Problems.

1. How does primary (10), Secondary (20) and Tertiary (30) amine react with
Nitrous acid.
(1). primary (10) amines:

ss***{Page 193 of 258}***ss
(2). Secondary (20) amines:
(3). Tertiary (30) amines:
2. How will you distinguish 10, 20 , 30 amines? (Any five).
S. Reaction Primary Amine Secondary Amine Tertiary Amine

No with (RNH2) (R2NH) (R3N)
1. HNO2 Forms Alcohol N-nitroso amine Salt
2. acetyl Forms
chloride N-alkyl acetamide N,N-dialkylacetamide. No reaction.
3. CHCl3& forms carbylamines No reaction. No reaction

KOH
4. CS2 and Forms alkyl No reaction No reaction
HgCl2 isothiocyanate
Alkyl Forms quarternary
5. halide ammonium 2RX+R2NH→R4N+X– RX+R3N→R4N+X–
(R4N+X–)salt.
( RX )
3RX+RNH2→R4N+X–
3. Write a note on reduction of Nitro benzene under different conditions.
(1). Strongly acidic medium:
(2). Neutral medium:
ss***{Page 194 of 258}***ss

(3). Alkaline medium:{Intermediate products are (C6H5NO) and (C6H5NHOH)} .

Which is undergoes bimolecular condensation.
4. Explain the mechanism of Nitration of Benzene.
General Reaction:
Mechanism: Step – I (The generation of Nitronium ion)
Step – II (Formation of arenium ion by electrophilic subtitution)
Step – III (Formation of Nitro benzene)

ss***{Page 195 of 258}***ss
4. Explain the Mechanism of Hoffman’s bromamide reaction.
IMPORTANT:
1. Carbylamines reaction.
ss***{Page 196 of 258}***ss

(OR)
2. Gabrial phthaimide synthesis.
3. Mustard oil reaction.
4. Formation of Schiff’s base.
5. Diazotization.
A cold solution of sodium nitrite reacts with aniline dissolved in
hydrochloric acid, a clear solution is obtained. This solution contains
‘benzene diazonium chloride’. This reaction is known as ‘diazotisation’.
6. Gattermann’s reaction.
ss***{Page 197 of 258}***ss
(OR)
7. Sand Meyer’s reaction.
(OR)
8. Gomberg’s reaction.
9. Reaction with carbonyl chloride ( COCl2 )
10.Reaction with CS2
21. BIO MOLECULE

1. Which is a mono saccharide among the following?
a) Sucrose b) Cellulose c) Maltose d) Glucose
2. Identify the reducing sugar.
ss***{Page 198 of 258}***ss
a) Sucrose b) Cellulose c) Starch d) Glucose
3. Sucrose is not
a) a di saccharide b) a non-reducing sugar.
c) Hydrolyzed to only glucose d) hydrolyzed to glucose & fructose
4. Sucrose contains glucose and fructose linked by
a) C1 – C1 b) C1 – C2 c) C1 – C4 d) C1 – C6
5. Glucose is not oxidised to gluconic acid by
a) Br2/H2O b) Fehling solutions
c) Tollen’s reagent d) Conc. HNO3
6. Inversion of sucrose refers to
a) Oxidation of sucrose b) reduction of sucrose
c) Hydrolysis of sucrose to glucose and fructose
d) Polymerization of sucrose.
7. Glucose forms___________ with acetic anhydride and sodium acetate.
a) Di acetate b) tetra acetate c) penta acetate d) hexa acetate
8. The amino acid without chiral carbon is
a) Glycine b) Alanine c) Proline d) Thyrosine
9. The building block of proteins are
a) α-hydroxy acids b) α-amino acids
c) β-hydroxy acids d) β-amino acids
10. Which is not true of amino acid?
a) Amino acid forms Zwitter ion b) Has isoelectric point
c) Dualbehaviours d) Amino acid is insoluble in NaOH solution
11. Two amino acids say A, B- react to give
a) Two dipeptides b) three dipeptides
c) Four dipeptides d) only one
12. A di-peptide does not have
a) Two peptide units b) portions of two amino acids
c) Anamido group d) salt like structure
13. Proteins are not sensitive to
a) Acids b) bases c) elevated temperature d) water
14. Denaturation does not involve
a) Breaking up of H– bonding in proteins
b) The loss of biological action of enzyme
c) The loss of secondary structure
d) Loss of primary structure of proteins
15. Specificity of enzyme is due to

a) The sequence of amino acids b) secondary structure
c) Tertiary structure d) all of the above
16. Ultimate products of hydrolysis of proteins is
a) Aniline b) aliphatic acid c) amino acid d) aromatic acid
ss***{Page 199 of 258}***ss
17. Proteins are
a) Polypeptides b) poly acids c) poly phenols d) poly esters
18. Which of the following contains a lipid?
a) Starch b) mineral oil c) edible oil d) peptide
19. Which among the following contains triglyceride?
a) Wax b) Cooking oil c) Essential oil d) Albumin
20. Which contains a long chain ester?
a) Wax b) cooking oil c) turpentine oil d) cellulose
21. An example of a fatty acid obtained from cooking oil is
a) Acetic acid b) stearic acid c) benzoic acid d) oxalic acid
22. Which is not a saturated fatty acid?
a) Palmitic acid b) Stearic acid c) Oleic acid d) Glyceric acid
23. Alkaline hydrolysis of cooking oil gives
a) Soap b) glycerol c) fatty acid d) both (a) and (b)
24. Hair and nail contains
a) Cellulose b) fat c) keratin d) lipid
25. Important constituent of cell wall is
a) Lipid b) cellulose c) protein d) vitamin
1. Glucose reacts with acetic anhydride in the presence of pyridine to give__
a) Mono acetate b) diacetate c) penta acetate d) no reaction
2. A mixture D(+) glucose and D(-) fructose is known as_______________
a) Cane sugar b) sweet less sugar c) invert sugar d) starch sugar
3. Starch when heated to 200-250 changes into______
a)Dextrin b) glucose c) fructose d) cellulose
4. The precipitation of proteins is known as___________
a)Denaturation b) renaturations c) coagulation d) peptisation
5. Cephalins have been implicated in the process of_______________
a) Metabalism b) organization of the body
c) blood purification d) blood coagulation
6. The optically inactive amino acid is _______________
a)Glycine b) alanine c) proline d) thyrosine
7. Sorbitol and mannitol are_______________
a) Isomers b) polymers c) epimers d) dimmers.
8. An example for reducing di saccharide is ___________
a) Glucose b) Fructose c) Sucrose d) Lactose
9. Occurs in the white matter of brain and all nervous system
a) Lacithin b) Cephalin c) Galacto lipids d) Amino acids
10. -------------- act as protective agent on the surface of animals and plants
ss***{Page 200 of 258}***ss
a) Carbohydrates b) Vitamins c) Nucleic acid d) Waxes
11. Which one of the following is a poly saccharides
a) Sucrose b) Cellulose c) Maltose d) Raffinose
12. When cellulose is boiled with dil.H2SO4 it gives
a) D-glucose b) D- fructose c) Dextrine a) Starch
IV. Five Mark Question& Answers: { Q.No. 69 (b) }
1. How is structure of Glucose determined?

1) Molecular formula of glucose is C6H12O6 ( by elements analysis &
molecular weight determination)
2) Glucose + (HI /P ) → CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3 (n-hexane)
This indicates that the six carbon atoms in the glucose molecule form
an unbranched chain of six carbon atoms.
3) Glucose + H2O → Neutral solution. (This indicates the absence of
Carboxylic acid (-COOH) group).
4) Glucose + hydroxylamine → Monoxime ( or )
Glucose+ 1HCN → Cyanohydrin. (This indicates the presence of
Aldehyde(-CHO) (or) Ketone ( =CO ) group).
5) Glucose + (Br2 / H2O) → Gluconic acid.(This indicates the presence of
Aldehyde(-CHO) group).
6) Further Oxidation: Gluconic acid + con.HNO3 → Saccharic acid. This
indicates the presence of Primary alcoholic (-CH2OH) group).
7) It reduces Tollen’s reagent and Fehiling’s solution. (This confirms the
presence of Aldehyde (-CHO) group).
8) Glucose + acetic anhydride (in the presence of Pyridine) → Penta acetate.
(This indicates the presence of five (-OH) group in a Glucose molecule.
9) From the above evidence structure of Glucose is given below.
2. How is structure of Fructose determined?

ss***{Page 201 of 258}***ss
1) Molecular formula of fructose is C6H12O6( by elements analysis &
molecular weight determination).
2) Fructose + (HI / P) → CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3(n-hexane)
This indicates that the six carbon atoms in the fructose molecule form
an unbranched chain of six carbon atoms.
3) Fructose + H2O → Neutral solution. (This indicates the absence of
Carboxylic acid (-COOH) group).
4) Fructose + hydroxylamine → Monoxime ( or )
Fructose + 1HCN →Cyanohydrin.(This indicates the presence of Aldehyde
(-CHO) (or) Ketone ( =CO ) group).
5) Fructose is not oxidized by (Br2 / H2O). (This indicates the Absence of
Aldehyde (-CHO) group).
6) Oxidation: Fructose + con.HNO3 → glycolic acid + Tartaric acid. This

indicates the presence of Carbonyl group as a Ketone (=CO) group).
7) Partial reduction: Fructose+ Na / Hg and H2O →Sorbitol + mannitol.

(Mixture of two epimeric alcohols)
Because anew asymmetric centreis being created at C–2. This confirms
the presence of a ketonic group.
8) Fructose + HCN →Addition product.(Which upon hydrolysis and subsequent

reduction with hydro iodic acid and red phosphorous gives 2-methyl-hexanoic
acid)? This indicates that the ketone group is adjacent to one of the terminal
carbon atoms.
Structure of Fructose:
ss***{Page 202 of 258}***ss

3. Show the formation of peptide bond with an example.
Peptide Bond:
The bond formed between two amino acids by the elimination of a
water molecule is called a peptide linkage or bond.
The product formed by linking amino acid molecules through peptide

linkages, – CO – NH –, is called a peptide.
Examples:
In peptide formation the two different amino acid molecules may
reactin one of the two ways.
4. Outline the classification of carbohydrates giving example for each.
Classification of carbohydrates:
Examples:
1) Monosaccharide: Aldoses – e.g. Glucose and Ketoses – e.g. Fructose

2) Disaccharide – e.g. Sucrose (or) Maltose.
ss***{Page 203 of 258}***ss

3) Trisaccharide – e.g. Raffinose
4) Non – Sugar (Polysaccharide) – e.g. (Starch (or) Cellulose (or) Inulin).
5. Mention the Biological importance of Lipids.
Functions of lipids in biosystems :

Fats and oils act as storage of energy in plants and animals.
(1)Fats: In the animal body, fats are stored in fatty tissues. Fat giveabout 2¼ times
as much energy as carbohydrates or proteins. For the bodyto maintain a
reserve energy supply. Fat is a poor conductor of heat. Hence, fat layer under
skin serves to prevent losses of heat from the body.
(2)Wax: Acts as a protective agent on the surfaces of animals and plants.Waxy
coating on the surface of plants and fruits protects them from excessive loss
of moisture and becoming infected with fungi and bacteria.
(3)Phospholipids: Lecithins and cephalins play a greater role in biosystem.
 Lecithins in the liver– used in organisation of the cell structure.
 Cephalins in brain – Used for blood coagulation.
(4)Galactolipids:
 It occur in considerable amount in the white matter of the brain and
of all nervous tissue.
(5)Galactose in the Glycolipids:
 Importance of milk sugar in the diet of infants and children during
the development of the brain and nervous system.
ss***{Page 204 of 258}***ss

22.CHEMISTRY IN ACTION
MORE IMPORTANT:
1. What are anesthetics? Give one example. (Jun-07,08, Sep-10,Oct-12,Jun - 14)
Loss of sensation is called anesthetic’s. Two types:
General anesthetics: They bring about loss of all modalities of sensation,

particularly pain along with reversible loss of consciousness.
Local anesthetics: They prevent the pain sensation in localized areas without
affecting the degree of consciousness.
Example: N2O, CHCl3, C2H5–O–C2H5.
2.In what way antipyretics are important. Give an example.( Mar-13)
Antipyretics are the compounds which are used for the purpose of reducing
fever (lowering the body temperature to the normal).
Example: Aspirin, Paracetamol.
3.Why iodoform and phenolic solutions are called antiseptic? (Mar-2008)
Antiseptic (Iodoform and phenolic solutions) is a substance that rendors

microorganism innocuous by killing them or preventing their growth.
4. What are antibiotics? Give an example. (Jun-2010, Jun-2013)
Antibiotics
Many microorganisms (bacteria, fungi and moulds) produce certain

chemicals which inhibit the growth or metabolism of some other
microorganism. Such chemical compounds are known as antibiotics.
Example: Penicillin.
5. In what way antacids are important? (Sep-2007, Sep-11,Jun-12,Mar 14)
Antacids
ss***{Page 205 of 258}***ss
Quite often, after eating oily and spicy food, one may feel uncomfortable due
to some burning sensation in stomach/food pipe. This is due to the
imbalance in the acidity in the stomach.
Certain drug formulations provide relief from such burning sensation.
These are known as antacids.Example: Magnesium and Aluminium hydroxides.
6. Give any three characteristics of Dye. (Mar-2011)
Characteristics of Dye.
(i) It should have a suitable colour.

(ii) It should be able to fix itself or be capable of being fixed to the fabric.
(iii)It should be fast to light.
7. What are chromophores? Give two examples. (Mar-07, Jun 09, Mar-2010)
Chromophores
An organic compound appears coloureddue to the presence of certain
unsaturated groups (the groups with multiple bonds) in it.
Such groups with multiple bonds are called chromophores.\
Example: Azo–N = N– , Carbonyl > C = O
8. What are artificial sweetening agents? Give two examples. (Sep09)
Mono and disaccharides are sweet in taste. Sweetness is commonly associated

with sugars. However, certain organic compounds which have been synthesized
in laboratories are known to be many times sweeter than cane sugar. Such
compounds are called artificial sweetening agents or artificial sweeteners.
Example:(i) Saccharin, (ii) Dulcin.
9. Write a note on Buna-S rubber. (Jun-2006, Jun-2011)

Buna-S:
Na
nCH2=CH–CH=CH2+ nCH = CH2 -------›
(Butadiene) |
C6H5
(Styrene)
– (– CH2–CH=CH – CH2 – CH – CH2– )n–

|
C6H5
(Buna-S)
In the name Buna-S, Bu stands for butadiene, Na for sodium (acting as
polymerization initiator), and S- for styrene.
ss***{Page 206 of 258}***ss
Buna-S is also called General Purpose Rubber Styrene (GRS). In actual
practice, it is obtained as a result of co-polymerization of three parts of butadiene
with one part of styrene.
Properties and Uses:

Neoprene and Buna-S are extremely resistant towards wear and tear and
used for the manufacture of tyres, rubber tubes and other mechanical rubber goods.
10. Write a note on Buna-N rubber. (Sep-2008)
Buna-N:
Na
2CH2 = CH – CH = CH2 + CH2 = CH -------›
(Butadiene) |
CN
(Acrylonitrile)
–(– CH2 – CH – CH2 – CH – CH – CH2– )n–
| | |
CH CH CN
|| ||
CH2 CH2
(Buna-N)

Buna-N rubber is hard and extremely resistant to the swelling
action of oils (petrol), solvents, heat etc. Therefore, it is used for the
manufacture of storage tanks for the solvents.
11. What are anti-oxidants? Give two examples. (Mar-2012)
Anti-oxidants
The substances that act against oxidants are called antioxidants.
Antioxidants thus minimize the damage caused by oxidants. Antioxidants
protect us against cardiovascular disease, cancer and cataract and they slow
down the effect of ageing.
Example: vitamin C, vitamin E and β-carotene.
12. How is nylon-66 prepared? Give its uses. (Mar-2009,jun-15)

Nylon-66:
It is obtained by condensing adipic acid with Hexamethylenediamine:
O O
|| ||
nH2N (CH2)6 NH2 + n HO–C–(CH2)4–C–OH -------›
(hexamethylenediamine) ( adipic acid)
ss***{Page 207 of 258}***ss
H H O O
| | || ||
– (–N–(CH2)6–N–C–(CH2)4 – C –)n–
(Nylon-66)

Nylon-66 is a linear polymer, and has very high tensile strength. It shows
good resistance to abrasion. Nylon-66 is usually fabricated into sheets bristles
for brushes and in textile. Crinkled nylon fibres are used for making elastic
hosiery.
13. Write a brief note on anti-septic. (Sep-2006)
Anti-septic:
Antiseptic is a substance that rendor’s microorganism innocuous by killing

them or preventing their growth. This term is used particularly for preparations
applied to living tissues.
Example: Iodoform, CHI3 and 0.2 percent solution of phenol
IMPORTANT:
1. What is Auxochrome? Give examples.
Auxochrome
 The presence of certain groups which are not chromophores themselves,

but deepen the colour of the chromogen. Such supporting groups are called
auxochromes.
Example: –OH, –NH2.
2. What is Analgesics? Give examples.
Analgesics
Analgesics are the compounds which relieve all sorts of pains without the
loss of consciousness. These are also called as pain killer, or pain relievers. These
are effective in headaches, myalgia and arthalgia.
Examples: Aspirin, Novalgin.
ss***{Page 208 of 258}***ss

3. What are antimalarial? Give any two examples.
Antimalarial
Malaria causes shivering and fever. The body temperature rises to 103 -
106oF.It causes physical weakness with the side-effects in lever and also causes
anemia. Substance which acts against malaria is called antimalarial.
Example: Chloroquine is used specially to control malarial parasite of the

ovale vivax etc. It is not used in curing the disease. It is used as a mixture with other
antimalarial.
4. What are antispasmodics? Give examples.
Antispasmodics There are a group of medicines that include natural

belladonna alkaloids (atropine, belladonna).
These medicines are used to relieve cramps, spasms of the stomach,

intestines and bladder. Some are used with antacid or other medicine in the
treatment of peptic ulcer. These medicines prevent nausea, vomiting and motion
sickness. In certain surgical and emergency procedure, these are used to help relax
stomach and intestine for certain types of examination or diagnosis.
Example: Anisotropine, Atropine, Dicyclomine, Cindinium cap.
5. Write a note on penicillins. Give its uses also.

Penicillins
Penicillins is the name given to the mixture of natural compounds having the
molecular formula C9H11N2O4 S - R, and differing only in the nature of R. Depending
upon the nature of R, there are at least six natural penicillins.
Uses.Penicillin is extensively used for rheumatic fever, narrowing of heart
wall, bronchitis, and pneumonia etc.
6. What is a food preservative? Give an example.( Mar – 2015 )

Food preservative
A chemical substance which prevents the spoilage of food material by
destroying the food-spoiling microorganisms in it is called a food
preservative. Example: Sodium benzoate, and potassium metabisulphite.
7. Name any three artificial sweeteners.

Saccharin, (ii) Dulcin, (iii) Cyclamate.
8. How is polystyrene prepared?
ss***{Page 209 of 258}***ss

1. Explain briefly characteristics of rocket propellants.

Rocket propellants:
1) Space vehicles consists of rocket engines powered by chemical
propellants is called rocket propellants.
2) It is a Combustible compounds(oxidizer + fuel).
3) Working of a propellant:
Propellant ignited large quantity of hot gases.
It is come out through the nozzle of the rocket motor, which provides the
necessary thrust for the rocket to move forward.
4) It is according to the Newton’s Third law of Motion (every reaction there is
an equal and opposite reaction)
5) Example: Liquid H2
2. Explain the theory of colour and structure of dye. (or) Explain

chromophore and auxochrome (otto-witts) theory about dyes.
Chromophore and Auxochrome theory:
(1).Chromophore:
An organic compound appears coloured due to the presence of
unsaturated or multiple bonds in it.
Examples: (1). –N = N– (2). > C = O
(2). Chromogen:
The compounds containing the chromophore group is called
chromogen. Example - (CH2 = CH2) is colourless,
CH3 – (CH = CH)6 – CH3 is yellow in colour.
(3). Auxochromes:
It is a certain groups deepen the colour of the chromogen.
Example: –OH, –NH2,
Example: p-hydroxyazobenzene (a bright red dye)
ss***{Page 210 of 258}***ss

Chromophore : –N = N–
Chromogen:
Auxochromes: — OH
3. What are anesthetics? Explain- types with example.

Anaesthetics: Drugs which produce loss of sensation.
(i). General anaesthetics:
The agent, which loss of all modalities of sensation,
particularly pain along with ‘reversible’ loss of consciousness.
(ii).Local anaesthetics:
It prevents the pain sensation in localized areas without
affecting the degree of consciousness.
Examples:
(N2O with ether) - Safest anaesthetic.
N2O is a colourless and non-irritating gas
4. Give the characteristics of dye.

Dyes are coloured compounds used in imparting colour to
textiles, food stuffs etc.
Characteristics:
(i) It should have a suitable colour.
(ii) It should be able to fix itself or be capable of being fixed to the
fabric.
(iii)It should be fast to light.
(iv) It should be resistant to the action of water, dilute acids and
alkalies (all detergents and washing soaps are alkaline in
nature).
5. Write briefly on Buna rubbers.

Buna rubbers: Buna rubbers are obtained as a result of polymerisation
of butadiene with acrylonitrile or styrene.
(1).Buna-S:
Na
ss***{Page 211 of 258}***ss
nCH2=CH–CH=CH2+ nCH = CH2 – (– CH2–CH=CH – CH2 – CH – CH2– )n–
| |
C6H5 C6H5
(butadiene) (styrene) (buna-S)
Uses :
Manufacture of tyres, rubber tubes and mechanical rubber goods.
(2) Buna-N:
Na
2CH2 = CH – CH = CH2 + CH2 = CH → –(– CH2 – CH – CH2 – CH – CH – CH2– )n–
(butadiene) | | | |
CN CH CH CN
( acrylonitrile) ║ ║
CH2 CH2
(Buna-N)
Uses : Manufacture of storage tanks for the solvents.
6. How are Buna-S and Nylon-66 prepared?
(1).Buna-S:
Na
nCH2=CH–CH=CH2+ nCH = CH2 – (– CH2–CH=CH – CH2 – CH – CH2– )n–
| |
C6H5 C6H5
(butadiene) (styrene) (buna-S)
Uses :
Manufacture of tyres, rubber tubesand mechanical rubber goods.
(2). Nylon-66:
It is obtained by condensing adipic acid with Hexa methylene diamine:
O O H H O O
║ ║ | | ║ ║
nH2N (CH2)6NH2 +n HO–C–(CH2)4–C–OH → –(–N–(CH2)6–N–C–(CH2)4–C –)n–
(hexamethylene (adipic acid) (Nylon-66)

diamine)
Uses:
Nylon-66 is usually fabricated into sheets, bristles for brushes and in textile.
Crinkled nylon fibres are used for making elastic hosiery.
***s***All the Best***s***
ss***{Page 212 of 258}***ss

Compulsory Problems
( Important reactions for Compulsory problems)
HYDROXY DERIVATIVES:{ Q.No. 70 (a) }
(1). Ethanol with Sodium metal:
2C2H5OH + 2Na → 2C2H5ONa +H2
(Sodium Ethoxide)
(2). Lucas Test:
(3). Ethanol with PCl5:

CH3CH2–OH + PCl5 → CH3CH2Cl + POCl3+ HCl
ss***{Page 213 of 258}***ss
(Ethanol) (Ethyl Chloride)
(4). In the presence of excess con.H2SO4

CH3CH2OH → CH2=CH2 + H2O
(Ethanol) (Ethene)
(5). Ethanol with Alumina →Ethene ;
(6). When alcohols are treated with chlorine water, or sodium hypochlorite or
bleaching powder solution, they are oxidised.
(7). Acetone with chlorine → Trichloro acetone:
(8). Iodoform reaction of Acetone:
(9). Iodoform reaction of Acetaldehyde:
ss***{Page 214 of 258}***ss

(10). Catalytic Dehydration of alcohols:
ss***{Page 215 of 258}***ss

(11). Victor Meyers Test:
(12). By the action of cold dilute alkaline potassium permanganate solution

which is known as Baeyer’s reagent on olefins, diols are formed.
CH2 = CH2 + H2O + (O) → CH2OH – CH2OH

(Ethene) (Glycol)
(13). With PI3, it forms ethylene diiodide, which being unstable decomposes to
form ethylene.
ss***{Page 216 of 258}***ss

(14). Glycol heated with anhydrous zinc chloride, ultimately acetaldehyde is

formed. This involves b-elimination.
(15). Synthesis of Glycerol:
(15). Glycol heated with conc. phosphoric acid (H3PO4), ethylene glycol
eliminates a molecule of water forming diethylene glycol.
(16). Concentrated sulphuric acid (H2SO4)being more powerful acid and

dehydrating agent removes two molecules of water from Glycol forming
dioxan.
ss***{Page 217 of 258}***ss

(17). Saponification Reaction:
(18). Dehydration:
(19). Nitration of Glycerol:
AROMATIC COMPOUNDS
(1). Hydrolysis of Benzlyl chloride:
(2). Reduction of benzaldehyde:

Benzaldehyde is reduced to benzyl alcohol on treatment with sodium
amalgam (Na / Hg )and water(H2O) or zinc and hydrochloric acid (Zn /
HCl)or Lithium aluminiumhydride(LiAlH4).
(3). Cannizzaro Reaction:
ss***{Page 218 of 258}***ss

(4). Benzyl alcohol with Sodium metal:
(5). Benzyl alcohol with Acetic acid:
(6). Oxidation of Benzyl alcohol:
(7). Phenol with Sodium metal:
(8). Phenol with Zn dust:
(9). Preparation of Phenol from Cumene: (Industrial method)
ss***{Page 219 of 258}***ss

(10). Kolbe schmidt or Kolbe’s reaction:
(11). Riemer-Tiemann reaction:
(12). Phenol with Ammonia: (In the presence of ZnCl2):
ss***{Page 220 of 258}***ss

(13). Coupling with diazoniumchloride :
(14). Oxidation of Benzyl alcohol:
(15). Benzyl alcohol heating with HI/P :
(16). Phthalein fusion:
16. HYDROXY DERIVATIVES { Q.No.70 (a)}
1. An organic compound of (A) of molecular formula C2H6O on treatment with

PCl5 gives compound (B).Compound (B) react with KCN give a compound (C)
of molecular formula C3H5N which undergoes acid hydrolysis to give
compound (D) which on treatment with soda lime gives a hydrocarbon.
Identify A, B, C and D. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2006]
2. An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C2H6O liberates hydrogen

with metallic sodium. Compound (A) on heating with excess of conc.H2SO4 at
440K gives an alkene (B). Compound (B) when oxidized by Baeyer’s reagent
gives (C). Find A, B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2009]
ss***{Page 221 of 258}***ss

3. An organic compound A (C2H6O) liberates hydrogen with sodium metal. (A)
Is heated with Al2O3 at 620K gives alkene (B) which when passed through
Bayer’s reagent gives (C) of molecular formula C2H6O2. (C) reacts with PI3 and
gives back(B).Identify A, B, and C. Explain the suitable reactions. [Mar-2011]
4. An organic compound A (C2H6O) is react with Al2O3 at 620K gives compound

B (C2H4). ‘(B)’reacts with cold alkaline KMnO4 (Baeyer’s reagent) to gives
compound ‘(C)’of molecular formula (C2H6O2). Identify A, B, and C. Explain
the suitable reactions. [Jun-2010]
5. An organic compound (A) C2H6O2 liberates hydrogen with metallic sodium.

Compound (A) when heated with anhydrous zinc chloride ultimately gives (B)
C2H4O whereas when heated with conc.phosphoric acid gives (C). (A) on
oxidation with acidified K2Cr2O7 gives compound (D). Identify the compound
A, B, C and D. Explain the suitable reaction. [Oct-2012]
6. An organic compound (A) of C3H8O gives turbidity within 5-10 min on

reaction with anhydrous ZnCl2/HCl. Compound (A) on treatment with
sodium hypochlorite gives a carbonyl compounds (B) which on further
chlorination gives compound (C) of molecular formula C3H3OCl3. Identify A,B
and C. Explain the reaction involved. [Mar-2006]
7. Compound (A) of molecular formula C3H8O liberate hydrogen with sodium

metal. (A) With P/I2 gives (B). Compound B on treatment with silver nitrite
gives (C) which gives blue colour with nitrous acid. Identify A,B, C and
explain the reaction. [Oct-2009]
8. An organic compound (A) C3H8O with Lucas reagent gives turbidity after
5 – 10 minutes. (A) With P/ I2 gives (B). Compound (B) on treatment with
silver nitrite gives (C) which gives blue colour with Nitrous acid. Identify (A),
(B) and (C) and explain the reactions. [Oct-2013] [refer oct-2009]
9. Compound (A) with molecular formula C3H6 is obtained from petroleum.

When (A) is treated with chlorine at 773K compound (B) of molecular formula
C3H5Cl is obtained. When (B) is treated with Na2CO3 solution at 773K/12 atm.
It gives the compound (C) with molecular formula C3H6O .(C) on treatment
with HOCl followed by hydrolysis with NaOH gives (D) having molecular
C3H8O3.Find A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2008]
ss***{Page 222 of 258}***ss
10. Two isomers (A) & (B) have the same molecular formula C4H10O. (A) When
heated with copper at 573K gives an alkene (C) of molecular formula C4H8.
(B) On heating with copper at 573K gives (D) of molecular formula C4H8O
which does not reduce Tollen’s reagent but answers iodoform test. Identify
A, B, C and D. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2009]
11. An organic compound (A) C6H6 is an aromatic hydrocarbon. Compound (A)

react with propylene in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 to give compound
(B). (B) on oxidation gives compound (C). (C) react with HCl to give
compound (D) and acetone. Identify the compound A, B, C and D. Explain
the suitable reaction. [Jun-2013]
12. An organic compound A of molecular formula C6H6O gives violet coloration

with neutral FeCl3.Compound (A) on treatment with metallic Na gives
compound (B). Compound (B) on treatment with CO2 at 400k under pressure
gives (C).This product on acidification gives compound (D) C7H6O3 which is
used in medicine. Identity A, B C and D and explain the reactions.[Oct-2006]
13. Compound (A) C6H6O gives violet colouration with neutral FeCl3.With CO2
at 400K/4-7atm, followed by acidification with HCl gives (B) C7H6O3 .(B) also
gives violet colouration with neutral FeCl3 and gives effervescence with
NaHCO3 solution. Compound (A) react with NH3 at 473K in the presence of
anhydrous ZnCl2 to give compound (C) C6H7N which undergoes
carbylamine test. Identify A,B and C. Explain the reaction. [Oct-2011]
14. An organic compound a (A) C6H6O gives maximum of two isomers (B) and
(C) When an alkaline solution of (A) is refluxed with chloroform at 333K.B on
oxidation gives an acid (D). The acid (D) is also obtained by treating sodium
salt of A with CO2 under pressure. Identify A, B, C and D and Explain the
reactions. [Mar-2007,Oct-2010]
15. An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H6O gives violet

colouration with neutral FeCl3.(A) gives maximum of two isomers (B) & (C)
when an alkaline solution of (A) is refluxed with CCl4.(A) also react with
C6H5N2Cl to give compound (D) which is a red orange dye. Identify A, B, C
and D. Explain the reaction. [Oct 2007, Jun-2011]
ss***{Page 223 of 258}***ss

16. An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C6H6O gives violet
colouration with neutral FeCl3 , react with CHCl3 and NaOH and gives two
isomers (B) and (C) with molecular formula C7H6O2. Compound (A) react
with ammonia at 473K in the presence of ZnCl2 and gives compound (D) with
molecular formula C7H7N.Compound (D) undergoes carbylamines test.
Identify A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2010,Mar-2013]
17. Compound (A) of molecular formula C7H8 is treated with chlorine and then
NaOH to get compound (B) of molecular formula C7H8O .(B) on oxidation by
acidified K2Cr2O7 gives compound of molecular formula C7H6O. Compound
(C) on treatment with 50% caustic soda gives compound (B) and also (D).
Find A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2008]
18. An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C7H8 reacts with Cl2 and
NaOH to give an aromatic alcohol (B) of molecular C7H8O which liberate H2
with metallic sodium. Compound (B) on reaction with CH3COOH in the
presence of conc.H2SO4 forms compound (C) of molecular formula C9H10O2
which has the fragrance of Jasmine. Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction.
[Mar-2012]
19. An organic compound (A) C7H8O liberates hydrogen with metallic sodium.
(A) on treatment with acidic potassium dichromate gives (B) C7H6O.
Compound (B) when treated with conc.N2H4& NaOH / KOH gives (A).
(B) with acidic anhydride in the presence of sodium acetate gives (C) of
molecular formula C9H8O2.Identify A,B and C. Explain the reaction involved.
[Oct-2008]
IMPORTANT:
1. An organic compound ‘A’ has the formula C2H6O. If liberates hydrogen with
metallic sodium.’A’ on oxidation with acidified dichromate gives ‘B’ (C2H4O).
‘B’ undergoes iodoform test ‘B’ on further oxidation gives ‘C’ (C2H4O2). ‘C’
gives effervescence with sodium bicarbonate solution. Identify A, B and C
explain the reaction.
ss***{Page 224 of 258}***ss

2. An organic compound ‘A’ (C2H6O2) with PI3 gives an alkene ‘B'. ‘A’ with conc.
Phosphoric acid gives a linear molecule ‘C’. ‘A’ with conc.H2SO4 gives cyclic
compound ‘D’ . What are A, B, C and D? Explain the reactions.
3. An organic compound ‘A’ (C4H10O) liberates hydrogen with sodium. When

heated with copper at 573 K it gives ‘B’ (C4H8) ‘A’ with PCl5 gives ‘C’ what are
A, B and C? Explain the reactions.
4. An organic compound ‘A’ (C3H8O3) is obtained as a by-product in the

manufacture of soap. With P2O5 ‘A’ gives ‘B’ (C3H4O) which has an offensive
smell. ‘A’ on oxidation with conc.HNO3 gives ‘C’ (C3H6O4) and ‘D’ (C3H4O5).
What are A, B, C and D? Explain the reactions.
5. An organic compound ‘A’ (C7H8O) on oxidation with Pb(NO3)2 gives ‘B’

(C7H6O) ‘B’ has bitter almond smell. ‘A’ when reduced with HI/P gives the
hydrocarbon ‘C’. What are A, B, and C? Explain the reactions.
6. An organic compound ‘A’ (C6H6O) gives violet colour with neutral FeCl3
solution.When distilled with zinc dust it gives the hydrocarbon ‘B’ . ‘A’ with
phthalic anhydride in the presence of conc.H2SO4 gives ‘C’ (C20H14O4) an
indicator. What are A, B and C? Explain the reactions.
7. An organic compound ‘A’ (C6H6O) is a weak acid. With NH3 in the presence of
anhydrous ZnCl2 ‘A’ gives ‘B’ (C6H7N). ‘A’ with dimethyl sulphate gives ‘C’
(C7H8O). What are A, B and C? Explain the reactions.
8. An aromatic hydrocarbon ‘A’ (C9H12) is obtained from benzene and propylene

in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3. ‘A’ on air oxidation gives ‘B’ (C9H12O2).
‘B’ on acidification gives ‘C’ (C6H6O) and ‘D’ (C3H6O) ‘C’ gives violet colour
with neutral FeCl3 solution. ‘D’ undergoes iodoform test. Identify A, B, C and
D, explain the reactions.
4. d – Block Elements {Q.No.70 (b)}

(Important reactions for Compulsory Problem)
( d-Block Elements )
Reactions of metals with acids

Elements Dil.H2SO4 Con.H2SO4 Dil.HCl HNO3
ss***{Page 225 of 258}***ss
11th 2Cu + Cu+2H2SO4 2Cu + 4HCl 3Cu+8HNO3(dil)
Group 2H2SO4 + → CuSO4 + + O2 (air) → →3Cu(NO3)2 +
Cu 4th O2 (air) → SO2↑ + 2CuCl2 + 2NO↑ + 4H2O
period 2CuSO4+ 2H2O 2H2O
(Reddish 2H2O
brown)
6th Cr + H2SO4 2Cr + Cr + 2HCl
group → CrSO4 + 6H2SO4 → → CrCl2 + No reaction
Cr 4 th H2↑ Cr2(SO4)3+ H2↑
period 3SO2↑ +
(Silvery 6H2O
white)
12th Zn + H2SO4 Zn + Zn + 2HCl 4Zn+10HNO3(dil)
Group → ZnSO4 + 2H2SO4 → → ZnCl2 + →4Zn (NO3)2+
Zn 4th H2↑ ZnSO4 + H2↑ N2O↑+5H2O
period SO2 ↑ + 4Zn+10 HNO3(very
(Bluish 2H2O dilute) → 4Zn
white) (NO3)2+NH4NO3+
3H2O
11th 2Ag + 3Ag + 4HNO3(dil) →
Group No reaction 2H2SO4→ 3AgNO3+ NO↑ +
Ag 5th Ag2SO4 - 2H2O
period + SO2↑ Ag+2HNO3(Conc.)→
Lustrous + 2H2O AgNO3+NO2↑+H2O
White
11th Aqua regia-3:1
Au Group - - - HCl& HNO3
6th 2Au + 9HCl +
period 3HNO3→ 2AuCl3 +
Lustrous 6H2O + 3NOCl
Yellow
Reactions of metals with following

Elements Air Water Chlorine Alkalis
11th 2Cu + O2 + CO2 + H2O →
group
ss***{Page 226 of 258}***ss

4th Cu(OH)2 . CuCO3
Cu period (Green) Copper Carbonate
Action of Heat: Cu + Cl2 → No reaction
Below 1370 K CuCl2
2Cu + O2→ 2CuO(Black)
Above 1370 K
4Cu + O2 → 2Cu2O(red)
6th At 20000 C With steam With dry
Cr group 4Cr+3O2→ 2Cr + 3H2O chlorine -
4th 2Cr2O3 → Cr2O3 + 2Cr + 3Cl2→
period 3H2↑ 2CrCl3
12th With Zn+2NaOH→
Zn group At 773 K impure Na2ZnO2+H2O
4th 2Zn + O2 Zinc - Sodium zincate
period →2ZnO (Zn-Cu).
Zn+H2O
(steam) →
ZnO + H2↑
Ag 11th No reaction
group - - 2Ag+Cl2→
5th 2AgCl
period
Au 11th No reaction No reaction At 2000 C No reaction
group 2Au+3Cl2→
6th 2AuCl3
period
Preparation of Compounds of d – block Elements
ss***{Page 227 of 258}***ss

S. Compounds Preparation Action of Heat

No
Step:1 ( at 1000C )
(1).CuO+H2SO4→ CuSO4 .5H2O→
1. Copper Sulphate CuSO4+ H2O CuSO4 .H2O
(or) (2).Cu(OH)2+H2SO4→ (Blue) + 4H2O
Blue Vitriol CuSO4+2H2O Step:2 ( at 2300C )
(CuSO4.5H2O) (3). CuCO3+H2SO4 → CuSO4 .H2O→
CuSO4+ H2O + CO2↑ CuSO4(White)
Step:3 ( at 7200C )
CuSO4→CuO + SO3↑
At 3000 C
Zinc Carbonate ZnSO4 + 2NaHCO3 → ZnCO3 →
2. (or) Calamine ZnCO3+Na2SO4 +H2O +CO2↑ ZnO + CO2↑
(ZnCO3)
3. Silver Nitrate (or) 3Ag + 4HNO3 → Step:1 ( at 723 K )
Lunar Caustic 3AgNO3 + 2H2O 2AgNO3→
(AgNO3) + NO↑ 2AgNO2+ O2↑
(Silver Nitrite)
Step:2 ( at 980 K )
AgNO2→Ag + NO2↑
2AuCl3+ 3SnCl2 → 2Au↓ + 3SnCl4
The gold thus precipitated is adsorbed by stannic
4. Purple of cassious hydroxide formed by the hydrolysis of SnCl4.
SnCl4 + 4H2O→ Sn(OH)4 + 4HCl
Chemical Properties of Copper Sulphate (or) Blue Vitriol(CuSO4.5H2O) :
(1). Action of ammonia:

CuSO4 + 4NH4OH → [Cu (NH3)4] SO4+ 4H2O
(Deep Blue Colour)
(2). Action of KI :
Step: 1 CuSO4 + 2KI → CuI2 + K2SO4
Step:2 2CuI2 → Cu2I2 + I2
(unstable) (white ppt)
(3).Action with KCN
Step:1 CuSO4 + 2KCN → Cu(CN)2+ K2SO4
Step:2 2Cu(CN)2 → Cu2(CN)2 + (CN)2
(Cyanogen)
(4). Action of alkalies
ss***{Page 228 of 258}***ss
CuSO4 + 2NaOH → Cu(OH)2↓(Pale blue precipitate)+ Na2SO4
(5).Action with H2S
CuSO4 + H2S → CuS↓(Black ppt)+ H2SO4
Chemical Properties of Silver Nitrate (or) Lunar Caustic (AgNO3) :
(1). With NaCl:

AgNO3+NaCl→ AgCl↓(Whiteppt)+ NaNO3
(2). With KBr&KI :

AgNO3 + KBr → AgBr↓(Yellow ppt)+ KNO3
AgNO3 + KI → AgI↓(Yellow ppt)+KNO3
(3). Action with organic compounds:

Ammoniacal silver nitrate (Tollen’s reagent) is reduced to silver
mirror bycompounds like formic acid, formaldehyde or glucose
2AgNO3 + 2NH4OH → Ag2O + 2NH4NO3 + H2O
Ag2O + HCOOH → 2Ag↓ + H2O + CO2↑
Note: Preparation of K2Cr2O7& Extraction of Cu, Zn, Cr, Ag, Au are

important.(Refer 5 marks).
4. d- BLOCK ELEMENTS {Q.No.70 (b)}
1. An element belongs ton group number 11 and period number 4.(A) is reddish
brown metal.(A) react with dil.HCl in the presence of air and gives compound
(B).(A) also react with conc.HNO3 to give compound (C) with the liberation of
NO2.Identify A,B and C. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2006,Jun-2011]
2. Silver react with dil.HNO3 to give compound (A) which on heating at 723K
gives (B).(B) on further heating gives (C).Further compound (A) react with KBr
and gives (D) which is highly useful in photography . Identify A,B,C and D.
Explain the reaction. [Mar-2009,Jun-2006]
3. The sulphide ore of an element of group 12 when roasted gave compound (A)
which on reduction with carbon gave the element (B) .The carbonate (C) of this
element is used for skin diseases. Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction.
[Oct-2006]
ss***{Page 229 of 258}***ss

4. An element (A) occupies group number 11 and period number 4.This metal is
extracted from its mixed sulphide ore (B).(A) react with dil.H2SO4 in the
presence of air and forms (C) which is colourless.With water (C) gives a blue
compound (D). Identify A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2007]
5. An element (A) belonging group number 6 and period number 4 is silvery

white in colour. Red hot, (A) decomposes steam liberating hydrogen and
forming (B).(A) also react with conc.H2SO4 forming (C) with evolution of SO2.
Identify A, B, and C. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2007]
6. An element (A) belonging to group number 11 and period number 4 is

extracted from the pyrite ore.(A) react with oxygen at two different
temperature forming compound (B) and (C).(A) react with conc.HNO3 to give
(D) with the evolution of NO2. Identify A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction.
[Oct-2007, Mar-2010,13]
7. The metal (B) is extracted from the ore (A).On treatment with dil.HNO3 metal
(B) gives a compound (C).Which is also known as Lunar Caustics. The
compound (C) on treatment with KI gives a yellow precipitate (D). Identify
A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2008]
8. A bluish white metal (A) present in 4th period and 12th group on heating in air
gives white cloud (B).Metal (A) on treatment with conc.H2SO4 gives
compound (C) and SO2 gas. Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction. [Jun-
2008]
9. An element belonging to group 12 and period 4 is bluish white in colour. (A)

react with hot conc.H2SO4 forming (B) with liberation of SO2.(A) also react
with dil.HNO3 form (C) with liberation of N2O. Identify A,B, and C.Explain
the reaction. [Oct-2008]
10. Compound (A) is a sulphate compound of group 11 element. This compound

is also called as Blue Vitriol.The compound undergoes decomposition at
various temperatures.
ss***{Page 230 of 258}***ss

. Identify A, B
,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2009]
11. A bluish white metal when treated with dil.HNO3gives (A) along with zinc
nitrate and water. With very dil.HNO3 it gives (B) along with zinc nitrate and
water.The metal when heated with air gives (C). Identify A,B, and C. Explain
the reaction. [Oct-2009]
12. An element (A) occupying group number 11 and belonging to the 4th
period,is reddish brown in colour.(A) extracted from its mixed sulphide ore
(B).(A) react with dil.H2SO4 in the presence of air to form (C).On treatment
with conc.HNO3 (A) gives compound (D). Identify A,B,C and D. Explain the
reaction. [Jun-2010]
13. An element (A) belongs to group number 11 and period number 5 is lustrous
white metal.(A) react with dil.HNO3 to give (B).(B) with KI gives (C) which is
bright yellow coloured precipitate. Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction.
[Oct-2010]
14. The chief ore of chromium (A) on roasting with molten sodium carbonate
gives compound (B).Compound (B) on acidification with conc.H2SO4 gives
compound(C). Compound (C) on treatment with KCl gives compound (D).
Identify A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2011,Oct-2013]
15. An element (A) is group number 12 period number 4 is extracted from its
sulphide ore.(A) react with O2 in the air at 773K to give compound (B) which
is called Philosopher’s wool.(A) react with hot NaOH to give compound
(C).Compound (C) on treatment with dil.HNO3 and forms compound (D)
with the liberation of N2O. Identify A,B,C and D. Explain the reaction.
[Oct-2011]
16. Element (A) which belongs to group 12 and period 4 is bluish white metal.(A)
react with conc.H2SO4 and gives (B) with the liberation of SO2.With NaOH
(A) gives compound (C).Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction.[Mar-2012]
17. An element (A) present in period No.4 and group No.12,on treatment with
dil.HNO3 form (B) with the liberation of N2O.(A) when heated with air at
ss***{Page 231 of 258}***ss
773K gives (C) which is known as philosopher’s wool. Identify A,B, and C.
Explain the reaction. [Oct-2012]
18. The chief ore of Zinc, on roasting gives a compound (A) which on reduction
by carbon gives (B).(B) react with conc.H2SO4 to give compound (C) and SO2
gas. Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2013]
CARBONYL COMPOUNDS: { Q.No. 70 ( c ) }

( Important reactions for Compulsory problems)
(1). Oxidation of primary & Secondary alcohol:
(2). Rosenmund’s reduction:
(3). Stephen’s reaction:
(4). Aldehyde with (HCN + hydrolysis + fenton’s reagent):
CH3CHO + HCN → CH3CH(OH)CN → CH3CH(OH)COOH → CH3COCOOH
ss***{Page 232 of 258}***ss

(5). Clemmenson’s reduction:
(6). Wolff’s kishner reduction:
(7). Polymerisation of actaldehyde:
(8). Oxidation of Toluene:
(9). Oxidation of Benzaldehyde:
(10). Clemmenson& Wolff’s Kishner reduction of Benzaldehyde:
ss***{Page 233 of 258}***ss

(11). Benzaldehyde with Aniline:
(12). Benzaldehyde with chlorine in the absence of Catalyst:
(13). Cannizzaro Reaction:
(15). Benzoin Condensation:
(16). Perkin’s Reaction:
(17). Benzaldehyde with chlorine in the presence of Catalyst:

ss***{Page 234 of 258}***ss
(18). Catalytic Oxidation of Secondary alcohol :
(19). Oxidation of Acetone:
(20). Reduction of Acetone:
(21). Acetone with Conc.H2SO4 :
(22). Acetone with Dry.HCl:
ss***{Page 235 of 258}***ss

(23). Dry Distillation of Calcium Benzoate:
(25). Condensation of Benzaldehyde with Ammonia:
(26). Acetone with Ammonia:
ss***{Page 236 of 258}***ss

(27).
ss***{Page 237 of 258}***ss

(28).
ss***{Page 238 of 258}***ss

(29). Preparation of Malachite Green:
(30). Halogenation:
(31). Clemmenson (or) Wolff’s kishner reduction:
ss***{Page 239 of 258}***ss

18. CARBONYL COMPOUNDS {Q.No.70 (c)}
1. Compound (A) of molecular formula C2H4O reduce Tollen’s reagents.(A) on

treatment with HCN gives compound (B).Compound (B) on hydrolysis with
acid compound (C) with molecular formula C3H6O3 which an optically active
compound. Compound (A) on reduction with N2H4/C2H5ONa gives a
hydrocarbon (D) of molecular formula C2H6.Identify A,B,C, and D. Explain the
reaction. [Mar-2013]
2. Compound (A) of molecular formula C2H4O reduce Tollen’s reagents.(A) on

treatment with HCN and followed by hydrolysis with acid gives compound
(B) with molecular formulaC3H6O3 which an optically active compound.
Compound (B) on reaction with Fenton’s reagents forms (C) (C3H4O3).This
answers iodoform reaction. Identify A,B, and C. Explain the reaction.[Jun-
2008,Oct-2008]
3. Compound (A) (C2H4O) reduce Tollen’s reagent .(A) on treatment with Zinc
amalgam and con.HCl gives compound (B) .In the presence of con.H2SO4 (A)
forms cyclic compound (C) which is used as hypnotic .Identify A,B and C.
Explain the reaction. [Jun-2011]
4. An organic compound (A) (C2H4O) with HCN gives (B) (C3H5ON). Compound
(B) on hydrolysis compound (C) (C3H6O3) which is an optically active
compound.(C) also undergoes iodoform test. Identify A,B and C. Explain the
reaction. [Oct-2011]
5. Compound (A) C2H4O reduce Tolen’s reagent .(A) on treatment with zinc
amalagam and conc.HCl gives compound (B) in the presence of conc.H2SO4
(A) forms a cyclic structure (C) which is used as hypnotic. Identify the
compounds A, B and C. Explain the reactions. [Jun-2011]
6. Compound (A) with molecular formula C2H4O reduce Tollen’s reagent.(A) on

treatment with HCN gives compound (B) .Compound (B) on hydrolysis with
an acid gives compound (C) C3H6O3. Compound (C) is optically active.
Compound (C) on treatment with Fenton’s reagent gives compound (D)
ss***{Page 240 of 258}***ss

C3H4O3. Compound (C) & (D) gives effervescence with NaHCO3 solution.
Identify the compounds A,B,Cand D. Explain the reactions. [Mar-2010]
7. An organic compound (A) C2H3OCl on treatment with Pd and BaSO4 gives (B)
C2H4O which answers iodoform test .(B) when treated with conc.H2SO4
undergoes polymerization to give (C) a cyclic compound. Identify A,B and C.
Explain the reaction. [Oct-2009]
8. An organic compound (A) C2H3N on reduction with SnCl2 / HCl gives (B)
C2H4O which reduce Tollen’s reagent. Compound (B) on reduction with
N2H4/C2H5ONa gives (C) C2H6. Identify the compounds A,B and C. Explain
the reactions. [Oct-2012]
9. An organic compound (A) (C2H6O) liberate hydrogen with metallic

sodium.(A) on mild oxidation gives (B) C2H4O which answers iodoform
test.(B) when treated with conc.H2SO4 undergoes polymerization to give (C), a
cyclic compound. Identify A,B and C. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2006]
10. An organic compound (A) with molecular formula C3H6O undergoes

iodoform reaction. Two molecules of compound (A) react with dry HCl to
give compound (B) (C6H10O).Compound (B) react with one more molecule of
compound (A) to give compound (C) (C9H14O).Identify A,B, and Explain the
11. An organic compound (A) C3H8O answers Luca’s Test within 5-10 mins and
oxidation form (B) C3H6O. (B) On further oxidation forms (C) C2H4O2 which
gives effervescence with NaHCO3. (B) Also undergoes iodoform test. Identify
A,B and C. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2009]
12. Compound (A) of molecular formula C3H6O does not reduce Tollen’s reagent
and Fehling’s solution.Compound (A) undergoes Clemmensen reduction to
give compound (B) of molecular formula C3H8. Compound (A) in the
presence of con.H2SO4 condenses to give an aromatic compound (C) of
molecular formula C9H12.Identify A,B and C. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2012]
13. Compound (A) C3H6O does not reduce Tollen’s reagent, but under goes halo
form reaction. Compound (A) under goes dehydration in the presence of dry
ss***{Page 241 of 258}***ss
HCl to give compound (B) C6H10O.Three molecules of compound (A) under
goes condensation reaction in the presence of conc. H2SO4 to give a cyclic
compound (C). Identify the compounds A,B and C. Explain the reactions.
[Jun-2012]
14. An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C3H6O on reduction with

LiAlH4 gives (B). Compound (B) gives blue colour in Victor Meyer’s test and
also form a Chloride (C) with SOCl2.The Chloride on treatment with alcoholic
KOH gives (D). Identify the compounds A,B,C and D. Explain the
reactions.[Mar-07]
15. Compound A of molecular formula C7H6O reduce Tollen’s reagents and also
gives Cannizzaro reaction. (A) on oxidation gives compound (B) with
molecular formula C7H6O2. Calcium salt of (B) on dry distillation gives
compound (C) with molecular formula C13H10O Identify A,B, and C. Explain
the reaction. [Mar-2008]
16.An aromatic aldehyde (A) of molecular formula C7H6O which has the smell of
bitter almonds on treatment with (CH3CO)2O and CH3COONa to give
compound (B) which is an aromatic unsaturated acid. (A) also react with (A)
in the presence of alc. KCN to give dimer (C).Identify A,B, and C. Explain the
reactions. [Oct-2007]
17. An organic compound (A) (C7H6O) form a bisulphate .(A) when treated with
alcoholic KCN forms (B) (C14H12O2) and (A) on refluxing with sodium acetate
and acetic anhydride forms an acid (C) (C9H8O2).Identify A,B and C. Explain
the reaction. [Jun-2007]
18. An organic compound (A) (C7H6O) reduces Tollen’sreagent. On treating with

alkali compound (A) form (B) and (C).Compound (B) treating with soda
lime forms benzene (C7H8O) is an antiseptic .Identify A,B and C.Explain the
19. An organic compound (A) of molecular formula C7H6O is not reduced by

Fehling’s solution but will undergoes Cannizzaro reaction. Compound (A)
react with Aniline to give compound (B) .Compound (A) also react with Cl2
in the presence of catalyst to give compound (C).Identify A,B and C. Explain
the reaction. [Mar-2006]
ss***{Page 242 of 258}***ss
20. An aromatic compound (A) with molecular formula C7H6O has the smell of
bitter almonds.(A) react with Cl2 in the absence of catalyst to gives (B) and in
the presence of catalyst to fives compound (C). Identify the compounds A,B
and C. Explain the reactions. [Mar-2009]
21. An organic compound (A) C7H8,on oxidation at 773K in the presence of V2O5
gives compound (B) of molecular formula C7H6O.(B) reduce Tollen’s
reagent.(B) on heating with sodium acetate in the presence of acetic
anhydride gives compound (C) of molecular formula C9H8O2.identify A,B
and C. Explain the reaction. [Mar-2011, Jun- 2013,Oct-2013]
22. An organic compound (A) C7H8, on oxidation at 773K in the presence of V2O5
gives compound (B) of molecular formula C7H6O, which has smell of bitter
almonds. Alkaline KMnO4oxidise compound (B) to (C) of molecular formula
C7H6O2. Compound (B) treatment with N2H4/KOH give back compound
(A).Identify A,B and C. Explain the reaction. [Jun-2010]
IMPORTANT:
1. An organic compound A (C7H6O) has bitter almond smell, with ammonia ‘A’
gives ‘B’ (C21H18N2) with aqueous alcoholic KCN ‘A’ gives ‘C’ (C14H12O2). With
aromatic tertiary amine ‘A’ gives ‘D’ (C23H26N2). What are A, B, C and D
explain the reaction.
2. An organic compound ‘A’ (C7H6O) reduce Tollen’s reagent with acetic

anhydride in the presence of sodium acetate. ‘A’ gives an α, β – unsaturated
acid ‘B’ (C9H8O2). With acetone in the presence of alkali ‘A’ gives ‘C’ (C10H10O).
What are A, B, C and D explains the reactions.
3. An organic compound A (C8H8O) undergoes iodo form test. When reduced

with Zinc amalgam and HCl it gives B (C8H10). ‘A ’with Br2 in ether at 273K
gives ‘C’ (C8H7OBr). Identify A, B, and C explain the reactions.
4. An organic compound ‘A’ (C5H10O) does not reduce Tollen’s reagent. It is a

linear compound and undergoes iodoform test. On oxidation ‘A’ gives ‘B’
(C2H4O) and ‘C’ (C3H6O2) as the major product. Identify A, B, and C explain
the reactions.
ss***{Page 243 of 258}***ss

SOME FORMULA,STRUCTURE& NAME FOR ORGANIC PROBLEMS
S. FORMULA STYRUCTURE NAME

No
1. C2H6O CH3CH2OH Ethanol
2. C3H6O CH3COCH3 Acetone
3. C3H8O (CH3)2CHOH 2-Propanol (or)
Isopropyl Alcohol
Tertiary butyl
4. C4H10O (CH3)3COH alcohol (or) 2-
Methyl 2- Propanol
5. C2H4 CH2=CH2 Ethene (or)

Ethylene
6. C2H4O CH3CHO Acetaldehyde (or)
Ethanal
7. C2H6O2 HO ─ CH2─ CH2─OH Glycol (or)
Ethylene Glycol
8. C4H10O3 Diethylene Glycol
9. C4H8O2 Dioxan
10. C3H6 CH2=CH-CH3 Propene (or)

Propylene
11. C3H8O3 Glycerol
ss***{Page 244 of 258}***ss

12. C7H8 C6H5CH3 Toluene
13. C7H6O C6H5CHO Benzaldehyde
14. C7H8O C6H5CH2OH Benzyl alcohol
15. C9H10O2 C6H5CH2COOCH3 Benzyl acetate
16. C7H6O2 C6H5COOH Benzoic acid
17. C2H3N CH3CN Methyl cyanide
18. C2H5OCN CH3CH(OH)CN Acetaldehyde
cyanohydrin
19. C3H6O2 CH3CH(OH)COOH Lactic acid
20. C3H4O3 CH3COCOOH Pyruvic acid
21. C2H6 CH3CH3 Ethane
22. C12H11N C6H5CH=NC6H5
23. C6H10O Mesityle oxide
24. C9H14O Phorone (or) 2,6-

dimethyl hept -2,5-
diene-4-one)
25. C9H12 Mesitylene (or)

1,3,5 trimethyl
benzene
26. C6H6 C6H6 Benzene
27. C9H12 Cumene
Cumene hydro
28. C9H12O2 peroxide
29. C6H7N C6H5NH2 Aniline (or)

Aminobenzene (or)
ss***{Page 245 of 258}***ss
phenyl amine
30. C6H6O C6H5OH Phenol (or)
Hydroxy benzene
31. C8H8O C6H5COCH3 Acetophenone
32. C13H10O C6H5COC6H5 Benzophenone
13. Electro Chemistry – I { Q.No.70 (d) }

1. If 50 milli ampere of current is passed through copper coulometer for 60
min, calculate the amount of copper deposited.
Solution:
Electrical charge input = I x t coulombs Log63.5 = 1. 8027
= 50 x10 A x60 x60sec
-3 Log180 = 2.2552 (+)
= 180 coulombs. 4.0579
The chemical reaction is, Cu2+ + 2e → Cu(s) Log 2 = 0.3010
1 gm atom of copper requires 2F current Log96500 = 4.9845 (+)
Amount of copper 5.2855
Deposted = (63. 5g.mol-1x 180 C )/2 x 96500C 4.0579 – 5.2855 = 2.7724
= 0.0593 gm. Antilog of 2.7724
= 0.05934
2. 0.1978 g of copper is deposited by a current of 0.2 ampere in 50 minutes.
What is the electro chemical equivalent of copper? (Mar-2009)
Solution :
Here, t = 50 minutes = 50 x60 seconds ; I = 0.2 ampere. Log0.1978=1.2962
Quantity of electricity used is Log600 = 2.7781
Q = I x t = 0.2 x50 x 60 = 600 coulombs 2.5181
Ant.log 2.5181
Amount of copper deposited by 600 coulombs = 0.1978 g =0.0003297
Amt. of copper deposited by1 coulomb = (0.1978 /600) g
= 0.0003296 g
Electrochemical equivalent of copper = 0.0003296
= 3.296 x10–4gc–1
= 3.296 x 10–7 kg c–1
3. What current strength in amperes will be required to liberate 10 g of iodine
from potassium iodide solution in one hour? (Mar-2012)
Solution :
ss***{Page 246 of 258}***ss

127 g of iodine (1g eqvt) is liberated by = 96,500 coulomb Log 96500 = 4.9845
Log 10 =1.0000
10 g of iodine is liberated by = (96 500/127) x 10 coulomb 5.9845
Let the current strength be = I Log127 =2.1078
Time in seconds = 1 x60 x60 Log 60 =1.7781
We know that the quantity of electricity, Q, used is given Log 60 =1.7781
by the expressionQ = I x time in seconds 5.6640
Curernt strength, I = Q /t = (96500 x 10) / (127 x 60 x 60) 5.9845 – 5.6640
Curernt strength, I= 2.11 ampere. = 0.3205
Ant.log of
0.3205=2.11
4. An electric current is passed through three cells in series containing

respectively solutions of copper sulphate, silver nitrate and potassium
iodide. What weights of silver and iodine will be liberated while 1.25 g of
copper is being deposited? (Mar-2008,Jun-2013)
Solution :
Log 1.25 =0.0969
Wt.of Cu / Wt.of Iodine=Eqvt.wt.Cu /Eqvt.wt.of Iodine Log 127 =2.1038(+)
1.25 / x = 31. 7 / 127 2.2007
x = (1. 25 x 127)/31. 7 Log31.7 =1.5010(-)
Hence, Wt. of Iodine ( x ) = 5.0 g 0.6997
Also, Ant.log of 0.6997
= 5.008
Wt.of Cu / Wt.ofSilver =Eqvt.wt. of Cu /Eqvt.wt.of Log 1.25 = 0.0969
Silver Log 108 =2.0334(+)
1.25 / y = 31.7 / 108 2.1303
y = (1. 25 x 108)/31. 7 Log31.7 =1.5010(-)
Wt. of silver (y) = 4.26 g 0.6293
Ant.log of 0.6293
4.259
5. The resistance of a 0.01 N solution of an electrolyte was found to 210 ohm at

25oC using a conductance cell with a cell constant 0.88 cm-1. Calculate the
specific conductance and equivalent conductance of the solution.
Solution : [R = 210 ohm ;l / a =0.88 cm-1]
Specific conductance (ĸ) = (l /a) x (1/R) Log 0.88 = 1.9444
=0.88cm / 210ohm Log 210 = 2.3222 (-)
-1
ĸ = 4.19 x 10–3mho.m–1 3.6222

Ant.log of 3.6222 = 4.19 x 10-3
Equivalent conductance, λ = k x V
ss***{Page 247 of 258}***ss
V has 1 gram equivalent dissolved given is 0.01 N in 1000 ml.
V = (1000 / 0.01)= 1, 00,000 ml
λ = 4.19x10-3x1, 00,000
λ=419.05 mho.cm2.gm.equiv.-1
λ = 4.1905 x 10–2 mho m2 (gm.equiv)–1
6. 0.04 N solution of a weak acid has a specific conductance 4.23 x10-4 mho.cm-1.
The degree of dissociation of acid at this dilution is 0.0612. Calculate the
equivalent conductance of weak acid at infinite solution. (Oct-2009)
Solution :[Specific conductance k = 4.23 x10-4 mho.cm-1 ; α= 0.0612]
λc = (k x 1000) /C = (4.23 x10-4) / 0.04 = (4.23 x10-4) /(4 x 10-2)
λc= (4.23/4) x 10-2 = 1.0575 x 10-2 mho.cm2.eq-1.
λc = 105.75 mho.cm2.eq-1.
α = λc/ λ∞ Log 10.575 = 1.0242
λ∞ = λc / α = 10. 575 / 0.0612 Log 0.0612 = 2.7868 (-)
= 172.8 mho.cm2.gm.equiv.-1 2.2374
Ant.log of 2.2374 = 1.728 x 102
7. Equivalent conductivity of acetic acid at infinite dilution is 390.7 and for 0.1
M acetic acid the equivalent conductance is 5.2 mho.cm2.gm.equiv.-1.
Calculate degree of dissociation, H+ ion concentration and dissociation
constant of the acid. (Jun-2007)
Solution :
α = λc/ λ∞= 5.2 / 390.7 = 0.01333 = 1.33% Log 5.2 = 0.7160
CH3COOH CH3COO¯ + H+ Log 390.7 = 2.5918 (-)
C (1 – α) Cα Cα 2.1242
[H+] = Cα= 0.1 x0.0133 = 0.00133 M Ant.log of 2.1242 = 1.331 x 10-2
K =α2C /(1- α)
= (0.01332 x 0.1) /(1- 0.0133)
= (0.0001769 x 0.1)/0.9867
= 0.0000179
K= 1.79 x 10-5 M
8. Ionic conductances at infinite dilution of Al3+ and SO42–are 189 ohm–1 cm2
gm.equiv.-1 and 160 ohm-1 cm2 gm.equiv.-1. Calculate equivalent and molar
conductance of the electrolyte at infinite dilution. (Mar-2010,13)
Solution:
ss***{Page 248 of 258}***ss

9. Calculate the pH of 0.1 M CH3COOH solution. Dissociation constant of

acetic acid is 1.8 x10-5 M. (Jun-2009,Mar-2011)
Solution:
For weak acids,
[H+] = √Kax C Log1.34 = 0.1271
= √1.8x10 x 0.1 = √1.8x10
-5 -6
[H+] = 1.34 x 10–3 M

pH = –log [H+] = -log (1.34 x10–3 )
=-log1.34 - log10-3 = -log1.34- (-3log10)
pH = -0.13 +3 = 2.87
10. Calculate the pH of 0.02 m Ba(OH)2aqueous solution assuming Ba(OH)2 as

a strong electrolyte.
Solution:
Ba(OH)2 →Ba2+ + 2OH–
[OH–] = 2 [Ba(OH)2] = 2 x0.02 = 0.04 M Log4 = 0.6020
= 4 x 10-2
pOH = –log [OH–] = -log (4 x 10-2)
= -log4 – (-2)log10 =- 0.6020 + 2
= 1.398=1.40
pH = 14 – pOH ; pH = 14 – 1.4 = 12.60
11. Find the pH of a buffer solution containing 0.20 mole per litre CH3COONa
and 0.15 mole per litre CH3COOH, Kafor acetic acid is 1.8 x10-5 . (Jun-
2006,11, Oct-2006,07,08,11)
Solution :[Ka = 1.8 x10–5 ; [salt] = 0.20 mol /litre ; [Acid] = 0.15 mol /litre]
pKa = –log Ka
pKa = –log (1.8 x10–5) = - log 1.8 – log10-5 log1.8 = 0.2553
= - log1.8 – (-5log10 ) = -0.2553+5
pKa = 4.7447
pH= pKa + log ( [salt] / [Acid] )
ss***{Page 249 of 258}***ss
... Henderson - Hasselbalch equation
= 4.7447 + log [0.20] /[0.15]
pH = 4.7447 + log (4/3)
= 4.7447 + 0.6021 – 0.4771
pH = 4.8697
12. The Ka of propionic acid is 1.34 x10-5. What is the pH of a solution
containing 0.5 M propionic and 0.5 M sodium propionate ? What happens
to the pH of the solution when volume is doubled by adding water? (Mar-
2006, Jun-2010) Solution :
Ka of propionic acid = 1.34 x10–5
pKa = –log Ka = – log (1.34 x10–5)= -log1.34 – log10-5 Log1.34 = 0.1271
= -log1.34- (-5log10)= -0.1271 + 5 = 4.8729
pKa = 4.87
By Herderson - Hasselbalch equation
pH = pKa + log ( [salt] /[acid])
= 4.87 + log (0.5 /0.5)
pH = 4.87
13. 0.5F of electric current was passed through 5 molar solutions of AgNO3,
CuSO4 and AlCl3 connected in series. Find out the concentration of each of
the electrolyte after the electrolysis?
Solution:
Amount of Ag deposited by passing 0.5F current = 108 x 0.5 = 54gm
Concentration of AgNO3 after the electrolysis = 5 - (54/108) M
= 5 –0.5 = 4.5 M
Amount of Cu deposited by passing 0.5F current = 31.75 x 0.5 = 15.86gm
Concentration of CuSO4 after the electrolysis = 5 - (15.86/63) M
= 5 – 0.5 = 4.75 M
Amount of Al deposited by passing 0.5F current = 9 x 0.5 = 4.5gm
Concentration of AlCl3 after the electrolysis = 5 - (4.5/27) M
= 5 – 0.17 = 4.83 M
14. Specific conductance of 1M KNO3 solution is observed to be

5.55 x10-3 mho.cm-1. What is the equivalent conductance of KNO3 when one
litre of the solution is used?
Solution:
λc = (ĸ x 1000) /C
= (5.55 x 10-3 x 1000) / 1= 5.55 x 10-3 x 103
λc = 5.55 mho.cm2.gm.equiv-1.
ss***{Page 250 of 258}***ss
15. The equivalent conductances at infinite dilution of HCl, CH3COONa and

NaCl are 426.16, 91.0 and 126.45 ohm-1 cm2 gm.equivalent-
1respectively.Calculate the λ∞of acetic acid. (Oct-2010, Jun-2008, Oct-2013)
Solution:
CH3COOH = CH3COONa + HCl – NaCl
CH3COOH390.71 ohm-1 cm2 gm.equivalent-1
ss*****All the Best *****ss
Created problem:
16. Find the pH of a buffer solution containing 0.30 moles per liter
CH3COONa and 0.15 moles per litre CH3COOH, Ka for acetic acid is
1.8 x 10-5. (Oct-2008)
Like Problem number 11. { Ans: pKa = 4.7447 & pH = 5.0457 }
Workout the following problems for 3 – mark questions

3 – MARK PROBLEMS
2.PERIODIC CLASSIFICATION-II
Covalent and Ionic Radii of an atom:

1. If the d(C-Cl) is 1.76 A0 and r (Cl) is 0.99A0.find the radius of carbon atom.
2. The value of Cl–Cl bond distance as found experimentally is 1.98Å. Find the
radius of Chlorine atom.
3. The value of d(C–C) distance as found experimentally in a variety of saturated
hydrocarbons is 1.54Å. Find the radius of carbon atom.
4. The experimental value of d (Si-C) is 1.93 Å and r(C) is 0.77. Find the radius of
Silicon atom.
Effective nuclear Charge:
1. Calculate the effective nuclear charge experienced by the 4s electron in potassium
atom. (s =16.8).
2. Calculate the effective nuclear charge of the last electron in an atom whose
configuration is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p5.
Electro Negativity of an atom:
ss***{Page 251 of 258}***ss

1. Calculate the electronegativity value of fluorine on Mulliken’s Scale form the
following data. Ionization potential of F = 17.4 eV/atom. Electron affinity of
F = 3.62eV/atom.
2. Calculate the electronegativity values of chlorine on Mulliken’s scale, given that
(Ionisation potential) (IP)Cl = 13.0 ev/atom and(Electron affinity) (EA)Cl = 4.0
ev/atom.
3. Calculate the electronegativity of chlorine from the following data EH-H =104 K cal
mol-1 ;ECl-Cl =36 K cal mol-1 EH-Cl=134 K cal mol-1.
7.NUCLEAR CHEMISTRY
Half-life period (t1/2) , Average life (τ) and decay constant (λ):
10.Calculate the decay constant for Ag108 if its half-life is 2.31 minutes?
11.Calculate the average life of 79Au198 leaving t1/2 =150 days.

12.The decay constant for 6C14 is 2.31x10-4 years-1. Calculate the half-life period.
13.Determine the average life of U238 having t1/2 = 140 days.

14.Half-life period of a radioactive element is 100 seconds. Calculate the
disintegration constant and average life of period. How time will it take for 90 %
decay?
15.The half-life of Th233 is 1.4 × 1010 years. Calculate its disintegration constant.
16.After 24 hours, only 0.125 g out of the initial quantity of 1g of a radioisotope
remains behind. what is half-life period?
17.The activity of a radioactive isotope falls to 12.5% in 90 days. Calculate the half-
life and decay constant.
18.The half-life of cobalt - 60 is 5.26 years. Calculate the % activity remaining after
4 years.
19.Wooden artifact and freshly cut tree are having 7.6 and 15.2 counts min-1g-1 of
carbon (t½ = 5700 years) respectively. Calculate the age of the artifact.
20.Half-life period of a radioactive element is 1500 years. Find the value of
disintegration constant interms of second.
Number of α and β particles:
1. How many α and β particle will be emitted by an element 84A218 is changing to a
stable isotope of 82B206?
ss***{Page 252 of 258}***ss
2. 92U
238 undergoes a series of changes by emitting and particle α and β finally
82Pb
206 is formed? Calculate the number of particle emitted during the change.
3. Calculate the number of α and β particle emitted in the conversion of 90Th232 to

82Pb
208.
4. On neutron bombardment fragmentation of U-235 occurs according to the

equation 92U235 + 0n1→ 42Mo95 + 57La139 + x -1e0 + y 0n1 Calculate the values of x
and y.
5. On neutron bombardment fragmentation of U-235 occurs according to the
equation. 92U235 + 0n1→ 42Mo98 + 54Xe136 + x -1e0 + y 0n1 Calculate the values of x
and y.
Calculation of Atomic number & Mass number:
1. The atomic mass of Th is 232 and its atomic number is 90. In terms of its radio
activity 6αand 4βparticles are emitted. What is the mass number and atomic
number of the product?
2. Calculate the number of neutrons in the remaining atom after emission of
αparticle from 92X238 atoms. Also report the mass number and atomic number of
the product atom.
Calculation of energy evolved or absorbed during Nuclear reaction:
1. Calculate the Q value of the following nuclear reaction.
13Al +2He →14Si +1H +Q. The exact mass of 13Al is 26.9815amu, 14 Si is
27 4 30 1 27 3
29.9738 amu, 2He4 is 4.0026amu and 1H1 is 1.0078amu.

2. The atomic masses of Li, He and proton are 7.01823 amu, 4.00387 amu and
1.00715 amu respectively. Calculate the energy evolved in the reaction,
3Li + 1H → 2 2He + ΔE Given 1 amu = 931 MeV.
7 1 4
9.THERMODYNAMICS-II
1. Calculate the maximum efficiency % possible from a thermal engine operating
between 110°C and 25°C.
2. What is the entropy change of an engine that operates at 100°C when 453.6 k.cal of
heat is supplied to it?
3. The normal boiling point CCl4, CHCl3 and H2S are 76.70 C, 61.50 C and –59.60 C
respectively. Calculate the molar heat of vaporization of each liquid, assuming
ideal behavior.
4. Calculate the entropy change involved in the conversion of 1 mole of ice at 0 0C and
1 atm to liquid at 00C and 1 atm. The enthalpy of fusion per mole of ice is 6008 J
mol-1.
ss***{Page 253 of 258}***ss

5. Calculate the change of entropy for the process, water (liq) to water (vapor, 373K)
involving ΔHvap = 40850 J mol-1 at 373K.
6. Evaluate the entropy change for the following process possessing

ΔH transition = 2090 J.mol-1.1 mole Sn (α , 130C) 1 mole Sn ( β , 130C ).
7. For a chemical reaction the values of ΔH and ΔS at 300 K are –10 k Cal mol-1 and
20 cal. Deg-1 mol-1respectively. What is the value of ΔG of the reaction? Calculate
the ΔG of reaction at 400 K assuming ΔH and ΔS values are constant. Predict the
nature of the reaction.
8. Calculate the standard entropy of formation ΔSf °of CO2 (g). Given the standard
entropies of CO2 (g), C(s), O2 (g) as 213.6, 5.740 and 205.0 JK-1 respectively.
9. Calculate the entropy increase in the evaporation of 1 mole of a liquid when it boils
at 100°C having heat of vaporization at 100°C as 540 cals\gm.
10.In the reaction N2(g) + O2(g)→ 2NO (g) , ΔH° reaction is + 179.9 kJmol-1 and
ΔS°reaction = 66.09 JK-1mol-1. Calculate ΔG° reaction at 300K.
11.The boiling point of benzene at 1 atm is 80.2°C. Calculate the enthalpy of
vaporization of benzene at its b. pt.
ORGANIC NITRGEN COMPOUNDS
1. An organic compound (A) having molecular formula C2H7N is treated with
nitrous acid to give (B) of molecular formula C2H6O which answers iodoform test.
Identify (A) and (B) .Explain the reaction.
2. When Benzamide is treated with bromine and alkali gives compound (A). Also
when Benzamide is reduced by LiAlH4. Compound (B) is formed.Find (A) and (B).
Write the equation.
3. C6H5CH2NH2 react with HNO2 gives (A) .(A) oxidized to form (B). (B) With
Zn/Hg in the presence of HCl gives (C). Identify (A), (B) and (C).
4. An aromatic primary amine (A) with molecular formula C6H7N undergoes
diazotization to give (B). (B) When treated with hypo phosphoric acid gives (C).
Identify (A), (B) and (C).
5. An aromatic simplest nitro compound (A) on reduction using Sn/ HCl gives
(B).(B) Undergoes carbylamines reaction.Identify (A) and (B).Give one use of
compound (A).
6. Compound (A) is yellow coloured liquid and it is called oil of mirbane. (A)
Reduction with Sn/HCl gives (B).(B) answer carbylamines test .Identify (A) and
(B).
7. An organic compound (A) with molecular formula C6H7N gives (B) with HNO2 /
HCl at 273K. The aqueous solution of (B) on heating gives (C) when gives violet
colour with neutral FeCl3. Identify the compounds (A), (B) and (C).
ss***{Page 254 of 258}***ss

8. An organic (A) of molecular formula C2H5NO treated with bromine and KOH
gives (B) of molecular formula CH5N. Identify (A) and (B). Write the equations
involved.
9. An organic (A) of molecular formula C2H5NO treated with bromine and KOH
gives (B) of molecular formula CH5N. (A) is reduced by LiAlH4 to give compound
(C).Identify (A), (B) and (C).
10. CH3NO2 react with Sn/HCl gives (A).(A) with CHCl3/ alc.KOH gives (B). (B)
React with H2/Pt gives (C). Identify (A), (B) and (C).
11. An aromatic hydrocarbon (A) on nitration gives (B) which is known as oil of
mirbane. (B) On warming with conc.H2SO4 gives compound (C). Identify (A),
(B) and (C).
12. An organic compound (A) C7H7NO when treated with Br2/alkali gives (B)
C6H7N. (B) Undergoes diazotization reaction. Identify (A) and (B).
13. CH4 reacts with HNO3 at 4000C gives (A). (A) React with Sn/HCl gives (B).(B)
react with CS2 in the presence of HgCl2 gives (C). Identify (A), (B) and (C).
MOST IMPORTANT THREE MARK QUESTIONS
1. State Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle.

2. What is the significance of negative electronic energy?
3. He2 molecule does not form why?
4. DefineBond order.
5. Define Hybridizations?
6. Why electron affinity of Fluorine is less than that of Chlorine?
7. Ionization energy of Neon is greater than that Fluorine, Give the reason.
8. Compare the ionization energy of nitrogen with Oxygen.
9. Define electron affinity.
10. The electron Affinities of beryllium and nitrogen are almost zero-why?
11. Compare the ionization energy of Aluminium(Z = 13) with that of
Magnesium (Z = 12). Justify your answer.
12. What is plumbo solvency?
13. Explain the dehydrating property of P2O5?
ss***{Page 255 of 258}***ss
14. H3PO3 is diprotic-Explain?
15. What happens when H3PO4 is heated?
16. H3PO4 is a tri basic acid-Explain.
17. Give any three uses of Neon.
18. Give any three uses of Helium.
19. Write a note on etching on Glass (OR) HF is not stored in glass bottle
why?
20. How is potash alum prepared?
21. Draw the electron dot formula forH3PO3
22. What is inert pair effect?
23. Explain the reducing property of H3PO3?
24. Why do d-block elements exhibit variable oxidation state?
25. Why do d-block elements form more complexes?
26. What is chrome plating?
27. What is aguaregia? Give the reaction of gold with aqua regia?
28. What is the action of heat on copper sulphate?
29. Write a note on chromyl chloride test.
30. Why Mn3+ is more stable than Mn2+?
31. A substance is found to have magnetic moment of 3.9BM.How many
unpaired electron does it contain?
32. Explain the principle behind in Hydrogen bomb?
33. What are the uses of radio carbon dating?
34. What are super conductors?
35. What is vitreous state? (Or) what is Glassy state?
36. Write a note on molecular crystal.
37. Calculate the number of CsCl unit in crystal.
38. Sketch the following lattice a) simple cubic c) bcc c) fcc
39. State the Kelvin-Plank’s statement of second law of thermodynamics?
40. What is Entropy? Give its units?
41. Define reaction Quotient.
42. Dissociation of PCl5 decreases in the presence of increase in Cl2 why?
43. Sate Lechatelier’s principle.
44. What is the relationship between equilibrium constant and dissociations
constant? Give one example.
45. What is opposing reaction? Give examples.
46. Write the Arrhenius equation and explain the terms.
47. Define order of a reaction.
48. What is Pseudo first order reaction? Give example.
49. What is Consecutive reaction? Give example.
50. What is parallel reaction? Give example.
51. What is activation energy?
ss***{Page 256 of 258}***ss
52. Show that the half-life period of a first order reaction is independent of the
concentration of the reactant.
53. What are promoters? Give example.
54. What is Brownian movement? Give reason.
55. What is electrophoresis?
56. Write any three general characteristic of catalytic reaction?
57. Gas in gas colloidal solution is not formed why?
58. What is peptisation? Give an example.
59. What is heterogeneous catalysis? Give example.
60. What is common ion effect? Give example.
61. What are buffer solutions? Give examples.
62. State Faraday’s law of electrolysis.
63. State Ostwald dilution law.
64. What is cell constant? Give its unit.
65. Meso tartaric acid is optically inactive-justify your answer.
66. Distinguish between enantiomers and diasteremoers.
67. Distinguish between racemic mixture and meso form.
68. What are the conditions for optical activity?
69. What is racemic mixture? Give example.
70. What happens when glycerol react KHSO4(or) conc.H2SO4 (or) P2O5? (or)
How is acrolein formed?
71. How phenolphthalein is prepared?
72. How ethylene glycol is converted into 1, 4-dioxan?
73. How is Dacron (or) Terylene (or) Terene prepared?
74. Give identification tests for phenol.
75. Explain Dow’s process?
76. How can the consumption of alcohol by a person be detected?
77. Phenol is insoluble in NaHCO3 but acetic acid is soluble-Give the reason.
78. Alcohols cannot be used as a solvent for Grignard reagents. Why?
79. Give a brief account on coupling reaction of phenol with benzene
diazonium chloride.
80. How is tertiary butyl alcohol converted to iso butylene.
81. What is Urotropine? Give its use.
82. Give the IUPAC name for the following. (a) crotanaldehyde
(b) Methyl n-propyl ketone (c) phenyl acetaldehyde
83. Give the tests for aldehydes.
84. How is acetophenone prepared by Friedel -Craft’s reaction?
85. What is trans esterification.
86. Mention the uses of Oxalic acid.
87. Mention the uses of Benzoic acid.
88. Mention the uses of Lactic acid.
ss***{Page 257 of 258}***ss
89. What is the reaction of lactic acid with dil.H2SO4.
90. Write two tests to identify carboxylic acid.
91. Give tests for salicylic acid.
92. What is aspirin? How is it prepared?
93. What happens when lactic acid is treated with PCl5? Write the equation.
94. What is Gabriel’s Phthalimide synthesis.
95. In what way antipyretics are important. Give an example.
96. Why iodoform and phenolic solutions are called antiseptic?
97. Give any three characteristics of Dye.
98. What are chromophores? Give two examples.
99. What are anti-oxidants? Give two examples.
100. How is nylon-66 prepared? Give its uses.
*****s*****All the Best*****s*****
PREPARED BY
K N SUBRAMANI. M.Sc.B.Ed., (CHEMISTRY)

LAB ASSISTANT
GOVT.HR.SEC.SCHOOL,
THUMMANATTY
THE NILGIRIS - 643002
9943009170 8248795898
ss***{Page 258 of 258}***ss


12th Chemistry Full Study Material em PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12th Chemistry Full Study Material em PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12th Chemistry Full Study Material em PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.

II. Three Mark Question & Answers: {Q.No.31}

2. What is the significance of negative electronic energy?(June-2008, June

Molecular orbital energy level diagram of He2 (hypothetical) molecule

4. Define-Bond order.(July-2007, Mar-2010)

(Nb) = number of electrons in bonding molecular orbitals.

6. Distinguish between waves and particle.(June-2006, Jun – 2014,Oct - 2014)

1).Localized in space 1).Delocalized in space.

7. What is Hybridizations?(Mar-2009, Jun-2013, Mar - 2015)

2. What do you mean Dual nature of matter?

3. Define molecular orbital.

III. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No.52 }

 (Z = 8), Electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 2p4.

Molecular orbital energy level diagram of O2 molecule

KK (σ2S)2(σ*2S)2(σ2pz)2(π2Px)2=(π2Py)2 (π* 2Px)1=(π* 2Py)1.

Where, (KK= σ1S σ*1S).

 Nature: Double bond & Paramagnetic

2. Explain the molecular orbital theory for Nitrogen (N2) molecule.

 (Z=7), Electronic configuration 1s2 2s2 2p3

Molecular orbital energy level diagram of N2

 Nature: Triple Bond &Diamagnetic .

3. Give any five postulates of molecular orbital theory (MOT).

Postulates Molecular orbital theory (MOT).

4. Derive De-Broglie equation. Give its significance.

For wave character,

Significance of de-Broglie equation : It has significant only for

5. Explain Davisson and Germer’s experiments.

6. Give the salient features of hybridization.

Salient Features regarding Hybridization:

 Orbitals involved in hybridization should have nearly the same energy.

7. What is Hydrogen bond? Explain its types.

 It’s a dipole-dipole interactions between the molecules in which

(a )Intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

(b) Intramolecular hydrogen bonding.

(INSIDE QUESTIONS (MARCH 2006 – JUNE 2015)

II. Three Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No.32 }

2. Why the ionization energy of Be is greater than B?(Oct-2006,Jun-08,

3. Why the ionization energy of Flourine is greater than Oxygen? (Oct-09)

4. The electron affinity of Fluorine is less than that of Chlorine? (Mar-

6. The experimental value of d(C-Cl) is 1.76A0.what is the atomic radius of

9. Compare the ionization energy of nitrogen with Oxygen. (Mar2007)

10. Define electron affinity.(Mar-2007, oct - 2014)

2. The value of Cl-Cl bond distance is 1.98A0.what is the atomic radius of

3. Ionisation energy of C is greater than B . Give reason.

4. Ionisation energy of Mg is greater than Na. Give reason.

5. Ionisation energy of Al is lower thanthat of Mg . Give reason.

6. E.A. of gold is comparatively high compared to other metals-why?

7. Define Atomic radii.

8. Define Ionisation energy (or) Ionisation potential.

12. Calculate the electronegativity values of fluorine and chlorine on

IV. Five Mark Question & Answers: { Q.No. 64 (a) }

a. Homonuclear diatomic molecules (A2 type) (e.g.F2,Cl2,Br2,I2 .. etc.)

2. Explain Pauling’s method of determination of ionic radii.

Following two assumptions are made to assign the ionic radii.

(i) r(C+) + r(A¯ ) = d (C+–A¯ ) ……………….. (1) where,

r(C+) - radius of cation and r(A¯ ) - radius of anion

r (C+) α 1/ Z* (C+) …………………….. (2)

r (A¯ ) α 1/ Z* (A¯) …………………….. (3) Where,

3. Explain the various factors that affect electron affinity.

KK (σ2S)2(σ2S)2(σ2pz)2(π2Px)2=(π2Py)2 (π 2Px)1=(π* 2Py)1.